Você está na página 1de 512

DRTS XX FAMILY

USER MANUAL

DOCUMENT No. MIE10170, Rev. 1.33, March 2015


TABLE OF CONTENTS
SYMBOLS 11
CHAPTER 1 – PRESENTATION 15
1. INTRODUCTION 19
2. SAFETY AT WORK 21
2.1. SAFETY 21
2.2. HAZARDOUS SITUATIONS 25
CHAPTER 2 – TEST SET DESCRIPTION 33
1. FRONT AND REAR PANEL 37
1.1. CONNECTIONS TO THE MAINS 39
1.2. OUTPUT VOLTAGES AND CURRENTS 41
1.3. AUXILIARY DC VOLTAGE OUTPUT 42
1.4. TRIP INPUTS OR ANALOG INPUTS AND AUXILIARY OUTPUTS 43
1.5. MEASUREMENT INPUTS 46
1.6. INTERFACE CONNECTIONS 47
1.7. LOCAL TEST SET CONTROL 48
1.8. LOW POWER OUTPUTS 49
2. POWER-ON 50
3. CONNECTION TO THE RELAY 55
3.1. BURDEN 55
3.2. CURRENT OUTPUTS 56
3.2.1. Current outputs indipendently used (mode 6I) 59
3.2.2. Paralleling two outputs 61
3.2.3. All currents in parallel 63
3.2.4. Series connection 65
3.2.5. Two in parallel in series to two in parallel (2P S 2P) 66
3.2.6. DC generation 68
3.3. LOW CURRENT RANGES: OPTION IN2-CDG 69
3.4. HIGH POWER, SINGLE PHASE OUTPUTS: HPB 400 AND HPB 600 72
3.5. DELTA CONNECTION OF CURRENT OUTPUTS 85
3.6. VOLTAGE OUTPUTS 86
3.7. AC VOLTAGE RELAY AUXILIARY SUPPLY 90
3.8. BATTERY SIMULATOR 94
3.9. TRIP INPUTS 95
3.10. ENERGY METERS TESTING 98
3.11. AUXILIARY OUTPUTS 102
3.12. LOW LEVEL SIGNALS 104
3.13. MEASUREMENT INPUTS 105
4. CONNECTION TO THE PC 106
5. TEST EXECUTION/PROBLE SOLUTIONS 116
6. POWER-OFF 119
CHAPTER 3 – OPTIONS 125
1. AMPLIFIER AMI 332 AND AMI 632 OPTIONS 129
1.1. INTRODUCTION 129
1.2. DESCRIPTION OF AMI 332 AND AMI 632 130
1.3. CONNECTION AND TEST START 131
1.3.1. Power-on 131
1.3.2. Connection to the relay under test 132
2. END TO END TEST SETS SYNCHRONIZATION 135
2.1. INTERNAL GPS OPTION 137
2.2. INTERNAL IRIG-B OPTION 138
2.3. EXTERNAL GPS OPTION 139
2.3.1. The GPS option function 139
2.3.2. Directions for the use of the GPS option 139
2.3.3. Test setup 141
3. LINE SYNCHRONIZATION OPTION 143
4. IEC61850-8 OPTION 145
4.1. INTRODUCTION 145
4.1.1. IEC61850-8 relay testing 146
4.1.2. GOOSE publishing 147
4.1.3. GOOSE subscribing 148
4.2. IEC 61850-8 INTERFACE 149
4.2.1. File 151
4.2.2. Exploring Goose, Virtual Contacts, Goose Publishing 152
4.2.3. Exploring Options & Log Activity 153
4.2.4. Goose List & Goose Details 157
4.2.5. Filters 159
4.2.6. SUBSTATION FILE 163
4.2.7. VIRTUAL CONTACTS 169
4.2.8. PUBLISHING 174
4.2.9. SUBSCRIBING 183
5. IEC61850-9 OPTION 188
6. DRTS9 OPTION 195
CHAPTER 4 – LOCAL CONTROL 201
1. CONTROL PANEL AND DISPLAY 205
2. MAIN CONTROL SCREEN 209
3. GENERAL SELECTIONS 212
3.1. LOAD TESTS 213
3.2. SAVE RESULTS 216
4. DIAGNOSTIC STEPS 219
CHAPTER 5 – LOCAL CONTROL: MANUAL CONTROL 223
1. INTRODUCTION 227
2. SETUP 228
2.1. SETUP/PREFAULT 230
2.1.1. Setup/Prefault/Values 231
2.1.2. Setup/Prefault/Auxiliary 233
2.2. SETUP/BINARY I/O 237
2.2.1. Setup/Binary I/O/C1-C6 and C7-C13 238
2.2.2. Setup/Binary I/O/Aux 243
2.3. SETUP/IN-3CDG 244
2.4. SETUP/TEST TYPE 245
2.4.1. Setup/Test Type/Shot 246
2.4.2. Setup/Test Type/Ramp 247
2.4.3. Setup/Test Type/Delta 252
2.4.4. Setup/Test Type/Dragging 256
2.4.5. Setup/Cycle Type 256
2.5. SETUP/TIMES 260
3. TEST 261
3.1. TEST/SHOT, RAMP OR DELTA 262
3.2. TEST/DRAGGING 267
4. STATUS 271
CHAPTER 6 – LOCAL CONTROL: DISTANCE ANSI 21 275
1. INTRODUCTION 279
2. SETUP 281
2.1. SETUP/GENERATE PREFAULT AND APPLY VDC 282
2.2. SETUP/BINARY INPUTS 283
2.3. SETUP/NOMINAL VALUES 285
2.3.1. Setup/Nominal Values/Vn (V) 285
2.3.2. Setup/Nominal Values/I test (A) 286
2.3.3. Setup/Nominal Values/Fn (Hz) 287
2.3.4. Setup/Nominal Values/V DC (V) 287
2.4. SETUP/CT SIDE 288
2.5. SETUP/KE GIVEN AS AND ZLOOP/ARC RES 289
2.6. SETUP/NOMINAL TIMES 291
2.7. SETUP/SWITCH 292
3. TEST 293
3.1. TEST/SHOT 295
3.1.1. Test/Shot/Fault Values 296
3.1.2. Test/Shot/Timer Settings 297
3.1.3. Test/Shot/Fault Type 298
3.1.4. Test/Shot/Table 300
3.2. TEST/AUTO Z-T 303
3.2.1. Test/Auto Z-t/Impedance settings 305
3.2.2. Test/Auto Z-t/Timer Settings 308
3.2.3. Test/Auto Z-t/Fault Type 308
3.2.4. Test/auto Z-t/Table 308
3.3. TEST/BORDER 309
3.3.1. Test/Border/Impedance Settings 310
3.3.2. Test/Border/Timer Settings 311
3.3.3. Test/Border/Fault Type 311
3.3.4. Test/Border/Table 311
4. GRAPH 312
5. STATUS 313
6. RESULTS 314
CHAPTER 7 – LOCAL CONTROL: OVERCURRENT ANSI 50-51 319
1. INTRODUCTION 323
2. SETUP 324
2.1. SETUP/GENERATE PREFAULT AND APPLY V DC 326
2.2. SETUP/BINARY INPUTS 327
2.3. SETUP/NOMINAL CHAR 329
2.3.1. Setup/Nominal Char/Protection 329
2.3.2. Setup/Nominal Char/Table 330
2.4. SETUP/PREFAULT 334
2.5. SETUP/DIRECTIONAL 50-51 335
2.6. SETUP/TIMER ERROR 337
2.7. SETUP/CURRENT ERROR 338
3. TEST 339
3.1. TEST/SHOT 340
3.2. TEST/AUTO I-T 344
4. GRAPH 347
5. STATUS 348
CHAPTER 8 – LOCAL CONTROL: OTHER SELECTIONS 351
1. HEADER 355
2. AUXILIARY SETTINGS 356
3. CIRCUIT BREAKER 358
4. AMPLIFIERS DIAGNOSTIC REPORT 364
5.1. CONFIGURATION 366
5.2. SUPPLY 368
5.3. TEMPERATURE 372
5.4. MEASUREMENTS 375
5. SAVE 382
6. CONFIGURATION 383
6.1. SOFTWARE 385
6.2. COMMUNICATION 388
6.3. HARDWARE CONFIGURATION 390
6.4. AMPLIFIERS 392
CHAPTER 9 – LOCAL CONTROL: APPLICATION GUIDE 397
1. INTRODUCTION 401
2. MANUAL TEST 402
2.1. REVERSE POWER RELAY TESTING 404
2.1.1. Three phase connection 404
2.1.2. Two phase connection 406
2.1.3. Battery accuracy 408
2.2. LOSS OF POWER RELAY TESTING 422
2.2.1. Test execution ((P, Q) plane) 424
2.2.2. More test in the (P, Q) plane 427
2.2.3. Test execution ((R, X) plane) 432
2.2.4. More test in the (R, X) plane 433
3. DISTANCE ANSI 21 RELAY TESTS 438
3.1. DISTANCE RELAY CONNECTIONS 440
3.2. STEP 1: SET NOMINAL PARAMENTERS 443
3.3. STEP 2: CHECK TRIP TIMES AND TESTING CONNECTIONS 447
3.4. STEP 3: CHECK KE 449
3.5. STEP 4: CHECK RELAY SETTINGS FOR ALL FAULTS 451
3.6. STEP 5: FINAL CONSIDERATIONS 453
4. OVERCURRENT ANSI 50-51 RELAY TESTS 455
4.1. OVERCURRENT RELAY CONNECTION 456
4.2. STEP 1: SET NOMINAL PARAMETERS 457
4.3. STEP 2: CHECK TRIP TIMES AND TESTING CONNECTIONS 465
4.4. STEP 3: CHECK RELAY SETTINGS FOR ALL FAULTS 467
4.5. STEP 4: FINAL CONSIDERATIONS 468
APPENDIX 475
APPENDIX I: CONNECTOR PINOUT 479
APPENDIX II: CABLE FROM DRTS XX TO BOOSTERS 481
APPENDIX III: DRTS XX SPARE PARTS 482
APPENDIX IV: EARTH FACTOR FORMULAS 483
APPENDIX V: ARC RESISTANCE 485
APPENDIX VI: FAULT CALCULATION 487
APPENDIX VII: OVERCURRENT RELAY CHARACTERISTIC CURVES 490
APPENDIX VIII: INTERNET ADDRESSES DEFINITION 495
APPENDIX IX: ISA INSTRUMENT RETURN FORM 497
APPENDIX X: CALIBRATION 499
APPENDIX XI: IEC61850 CERTIFICATES 501
Page left intentionally blank.
SYMBOLS

The following table lists the main symbols used in the document:
Symbol Description

CAUTION: Close attention or vigilance to minimize risk

WARING: Indication about impending danger, difficulty,


or misfortune

EXAMPLE: A problem or exercise used to illustrate a


principle or method
Table 1 – Main symbols
Page left intentionally blank.
Disclaimer
Every effort has been made to make this material complete, accurate, and
up-to-date. In addition, changes are periodically added to the information
herein; these changes will be incorporated into new editions of the
publication. ISA reserves the right to make improvements and/or changes in
the product(s) and/or the program(s), described in this document without
notice, and shall not be responsible for any damages, including but not
limited to consequential damages, caused by reliance on the material
presented, including but not limited to typographical errors.

Copies, reprints or other reproductions of the content or of parts of this


publication shall only be permitted with ISA prior written consent.
All trademarks are the property of their respective holders.

Copyright 2015© ISA S.r.l. Italy - All rights reserve


Page left intentionally blank.
DRTS XX FAMILY
CHAPTER 1 - PRESENTATION
Chapter 1
PRESENTATION

DOCUMENT No. MIE10170, Rev. 1.33, March 2015


TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 - PRESENTATION ................................................................... 15
1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................... 19
2 SAFETY AT WORK ............................................................................. 21
2.1 SAFETY ............................................................................................ 21
2.2 HAZARDOUS SITUATIONS .................................................................... 25
Page left intentionally blank.
1 INTRODUCTION
The DRTS XX User Manual provides information about how to use, repair
and maintain the instrument.
The following table lists the model of the DRTS XX:
Model Description
DRTS 66 Six currents and six voltages
DRTS 64 Six currents and four voltages
DRTS 34 Three currents and four voltages
DRTS 33 Three currents and three voltages
Table 1 - DRTS XX models

The following table lists the components common to all models:


ITEM Component
1 The auxiliary DC voltage generator
12 trip inputs, of which 2 inputs perform also high-
2
frequency impulse counting
3 Four digital relay outputs and four logic outputs
A connector with low power signals, logic outputs and for
4
external modules
5 Low voltage and low current measurement inputs
6 The interface connectors: USB, ETHRENET
7 An USB pen drive connector
Table 2 - DRTS XX components
The following table lists the internal options:
ITEM Component
TRANSCOPE measurement option, which allows measuring 10
voltages, and performing function such as:
1 • Wattmeter
• Oscilloscope
• Oscillo-perturbgraph
IRIG-B option. It includes the following:
• Test set synchronization
2 • Binary outputs, transistor
• Low level voltage outputs
• Connection to external modules
3 Internal GPS option
IEC61850-8 option (it controls devices with that type of
4
interface)
The IEC61850-9 option (it controls devices with that type of
5
interface)
Table 3 - DRTS XX Internal options

The following table lists the external options:


ITEM Component
1 SH-2003 option (Energy Meter Universal Scanning Head)
2 IN2-CDG current booster
3 HPB 400 and HPB 600 booster options
4 DRTS XX Line Synchronizer
5 Three phase current amplifier AMI 332
6 Three phase current amplifier AMI 632
Table 4 - DRTS XX external options
2 SAFETY AT WORK
2.1 Safety
The product DRTS XX is manufactured and tested according to the
specifications, and when used for normal applications and within the normal
electrical and mechanical limits, it does not cause hazard to health and
safety, provided that the standard engineering rules are observed and that
it is used by trained personnel only.
The application guide is published to be used together with the product
described in the corresponding document. ISA reserves the right to modify
the guide without warning, for any reason. This includes also but not only,
the adoption of advanced technological solutions and modified
manufacturing procedures, and the addition of other features, not available
in the first release.
ISA declines any difficulties arising from unknown technical problems.

CAUTION: ISA declines also any responsibility in case of use


beyond the Specifications, modification of the Product or of
any intervention not authorized by ISA in writing

The warranty includes the repair time and the materials necessary to restore
the complete efficiency of the Product; so, it does not include other burdens,
such as the transport and customs fee.

CAUTION: Under no circumstances, the warrantee includes


any cost that the User may have suffered because of the
product unavailability and downtime

The product DRTS XX is CE marked, and it has been tested to operate


according to EN 61010-1, with the following operating conditions:
• Pollution degree 2: normally, non-conductive pollution occurs
• Measurement category 2, for measurement inputs
CAUTION: If the product is used beyond these limits, its safety
could be impaired

Mains supply characteristics are the following:


• 85÷265 V AC; 50-60 Hz
• Power consumption: 100 W at rest; up to 2,000 W with the
maximum output power
At the end of its life, the product has to be disposed in a waste dedicated to
electric and electronic equipment.

The following table lists the marks on the DRTS XX:


Symbol Description

RoHS compliance (to be disposed as an electronic device)

CE marking

Table 5 - Marks on DRTS XX


The following table lists the applied requirements of the EN61010-1
standard, paragraph 5.4:

Item Description

The USB and ETHERNET ports are isolated with respect to the
1
ground and all the internal circuitry at 1 kV AC, 50 Hz
Cleaning of the display can be done using a dry (or slightly wet)
cloth
2 CAUTION: Do not use solvents, as they would
penetrate the display, and cause a permanent
damage

As soon as the mains supply plug is fit, the test set is powered-on
and goes to a stand-by status. Removing the power supply cable
3
is an emergency intervention: so, leave room around it so that it
is possible to remove it
The test set is to be operated with the handle below it and with
the rear at least 0.1 m far from the wall. To below the test, in
4 fact, the cooling airflows from the rear, where it is sucked, set. If
this flow is barred, the test set would increase its temperature,
at the detriment of its expected life
Table 6 - Requirements of the EN61010-1 standard
The product deals with voltages and currents that may be lethal to the
unadvertised user. Besides, in order to avoid any danger in case of fault
inside the product, the device under test should have the following
characteristics:
• Connection sockets must be not accessible
• Input circuits must have an isolation degree at least equal to the
one of the Product
• The following table lists the applicable symbols:

Symbol Description

It is related to dangerous output, and it is located close


to AC and DC voltage outputs

Ground
It is located close to the ground socket

Fuse
It is located close to the mains supply protection fuse
Table 7 - Symbols of a relay under test
2.2 Hazardous situations
The following table lists a number of situations that are potentially
hazardous to the user and/or to the product (please, consider this list, and
refer to the Chapter 3 for further details):
Hazardous
ITEM Risk Check
situation
Capacitor dividers take the case
Test set not at 110 V.
1 grounded The unit is not protected against
Ground connection
common mode noise
The test set ground and the
neutral ground are connected to
very distant points of the grid.
There is a voltage differential
between the grounds. In case of
Voltage (or fault, there is a heavy risk for the
current) test set and for the operator.
neutral WARNING: VN (IN) connected to
2 connected to ground
Besides, it is likely
ground at far that transient
end spikes occur during
the test; their
value can exceed
the rated isolation
limits

Power supply The test set cannot be operated;


3 too high risk of damage
Mains supply

The contact can be dangerous to


the user or even the plant Connect and power-on
WARNING: The WARNING:
V, I Outputs test set voltage Don’t
4 contact a live outputs are change
wire protected only connections
prior to the first after power
test on

Table 8 - Potentially hazardous situations


Hazardous
ITEM Risk Check
situation
Loss of
power There can be a loss of control
supply while because the microprocessor resets
5 the test set while energy was applied to the
Quality monitor
was load
generating
Current
The voltage and current neutrals
neutral
are not connected: current circuits Connect the relay I
6 connected to
are open; the test set signals neutral to IN
VN instead of
overload
IN
Table 9 - Potentially hazardous situations

The first three points are very hazardous, both for the user and the test set.

WARNING: These types of fault are not covered by the


warranty

Some considerations about the previous hazards:


Hazard No. 1
The lower LED (16) that turns on signals this hazard: it is impossible to
power-on the test set.
The following image exhibits the upper and lower LED (16):

Figure 1 - Front panel: LED (16), upper and lower


The following image exhibits the reason of the problem:

Figure 2 – Hazard No. 1

Capacitors shown are included in the mains supply filter. Of course, their
value is low, so that the current flow is limited according to specification;
however, you can feel it. Besides, there is no protection against common
mode spikes that are usually discharged to the ground.
It is possible to connect the test set to ground, via the yellow socket on the
rear and the cable with crocodile provided: any metal frame (i.e. heating,
water, windows), provides a sufficient grounding path.
Hazard No. 2
This is a very hazardous situation, both for the user and the test set.

CAUTION: Fault is not covered by the warranty

The hazard does not apply if the relay to be tested is not connected to the
plant. If, instead, the connection to the relay is performed by means of a test
connector (or by terminal blocks), the operator must be sure to interrupt
the ground connection of the CT and VT secondary. This is normally true;
however, we experienced some instance where the neutral was grounded.
The following image exhibits the described situation:

Figure 3 - Hazard No. 2

The problem in this instance is that VN of VT’s (or IN of CT’s), is connected


to ground in a point of the grid that is far away (sometimes very far away)
from the control building. A voltage differential that is caused by eddy
currents is between the ground of the test set and the ground of VT’s, there
is; in case of ground fault, this voltage grows to lethal levels, for both the
user and the test set.
Besides, high-energy spikes between the two grounding points are easy to
develop. These spikes have amplitudes and energy that can exceed the rated
isolation limits. Checking the error is simple: just test with a resistance meter
that there is no connection between VN and the ground.
Hazard No. 3
The test set maximum supply is 264 V: beyond it, up to 400 V, the test set is
not damaged, but it does not power on.
The upper LED (16) that turns on signals the high supply: it is impossible to
power-on the test set.
The following image exhibits the upper and lower LED (16):

Figure 4 - Front panel: LED (16), upper and lower


Page left intentionally blank.
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1 - FRONT PANEL: LED (16), UPPER AND LOWER ........................................ 26
FIGURE 2 – HAZARD NO. 1................................................................................ 27
FIGURE 3 - HAZARD NO. 2 ................................................................................ 28
FIGURE 4 - FRONT PANEL: LED (16), UPPER AND LOWER ........................................ 29
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE 1 - DRTS XX MODELS ............................................................................. 19
TABLE 2 - DRTS XX COMPONENTS ..................................................................... 19
TABLE 3 - DRTS XX INTERNAL OPTIONS ............................................................... 20
TABLE 4 - DRTS XX EXTERNAL OPTIONS ............................................................... 20
TABLE 5 - MARKS ON DRTS XX ......................................................................... 22
TABLE 6 - REQUIREMENTS OF THE EN61010-1 STANDARD ..................................... 23
TABLE 7 - SYMBOLS OF A RELAY UNDER TEST ......................................................... 24
TABLE 8 - POTENTIALLY HAZARDOUS SITUATIONS ................................................... 25
TABLE 9 - POTENTIALLY HAZARDOUS SITUATIONS ................................................... 26
DRTS XX FAMILY
CHAPTER 2 – TEST SET DChapter
ESCRIPTION 2
TEST SET DESCRIPTION

DOCUMENT No. MIE10170, Rev. 1.33, March 2015


TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 2 – TEST SET DESCRIPTION ...................................................... 33
1 FRONT AND REAR PANEL ................................................................ 37
1.1 CONNECTION TO THE MAINS .............................................................. 39
1.2 OUTPUT VOLTAGES AND CURRENTS ..................................................... 41
1.3 AUXILIARY DC VOLTAGE OUTPUT ........................................................ 42
1.4 TRIP INPUTS OR ANALOG INPUTS AND AUXILIARY OUTPUTS ....................... 43
1.5 MEASUREMENT INPUTS..................................................................... 46
1.6 INTERFACE CONNECTIONS .................................................................. 47
1.7 LOCAL TEST SET CONTROL .................................................................. 48
1.8 LOW POWER OUTPUTS ...................................................................... 49
2 POWER-ON ..................................................................................... 50
3 CONNECTION TO THE RELAY ........................................................... 55
3.1 BURDEN ......................................................................................... 55
3.2 CURRENT OUTPUTS .......................................................................... 56
3.2.1 Current outputs independently used (mode 6I) .................. 59
3.2.2 Paralleling two outputs ....................................................... 61
3.2.3 All currents in parallel ......................................................... 63
3.2.4 Series connection ................................................................ 65
3.2.5 Two in parallel in series to two in parallel (2P S 2P) ........... 66
3.2.6 DC generation ..................................................................... 68
3.3 LOW CURRENT RANGES: IN2-CDG OPTION........................................... 69
3.4 HIGH POWER, SINGLE PHASE OUTPUTS: HPB 400 AND HPB 600 ............. 72
3.5 DELTA CONNECTION OF CURRENT OUTPUTS ........................................... 85
3.6 VOLTAGE OUTPUTS .......................................................................... 86
3.7 AC VOLTAGE RELAY AUXILIARY SUPPLY ................................................. 90
3.8 BATTERY SIMULATOR ........................................................................ 93
3.9 TRIP INPUTS .................................................................................... 95
3.10 ENERGY METERS TESTING .................................................................. 98
3.11 AUXILIARY OUTPUTS ....................................................................... 102
3.12 LOW LEVEL SIGNALS........................................................................ 104
3.13 MEASUREMENT INPUTS................................................................... 105
4 CONNECTION TO THE PC ............................................................... 106
5 TEST EXECUTION/PROBLEM SOLUTIONS ....................................... 116
6 POWER-OFF .................................................................................. 119
1 FRONT AND REAR PANEL
The following image exhibits the front panel:

Figure 1 - Front panel

The following table lists the components of the front panel:


ITEM Component
1 Local control function keys
2 Color display
3 Digital input knob with switch
4 Safety sockets of auxiliary contacts A1÷A4
5 Fuses to protect the analog measurement inputs, type T63mA 250 V
6 Safety sockets of voltage and current measurement inputs
Safety sockets of trip inputs C1÷C12, with six isolated references. They include
7
the Imp1 and Imp2 counting inputs
8 Lights confirming the interface connections
9 IEC61850-8 connector (option)
10 USB interface connector
11 USB flash disk connector
12 DC voltage safety sockets
Voltage output safety sockets: all phases have two common neutrals (VN),
13 isolated from IN. DRTS 66 has 6 sockets, DRTS 64 and 34 have four sockets and
DRTS 33 has three sockets
Current output safety sockets: all phases have two common neutrals (IN),
14 isolated from VN. DRTS 66 and 64 has 6 sockets, DRTS 34 and 33 have three
sockets
15 Twelve keys keyboard, for the local control
16 Power-on alarm lights (ground missing, supply too high)
17 Power-on push-button
18 Power-on light
Table 1 - Front panel components
The following image exhibits the front panel:

Figure 2 - Rear panel

The following table lists the components of the rear panel:


ITEM Component
19 Power supply socket
20 Mains supply fuses (P and N), type T16AH, 250 V
21 Auxiliary DC supply fuse, type T1AL 250 V
22 Ground socket
23 IRIG-B optical interface connector
24 ETHERNET interface connector
25 IEC61850-9 optical cable interface connectors
External amplifiers and I/O expansion, low level outputs and digital outputs 32-
26
way connector
Table 2 - rear panel components

The following table lists the label elements on the rear of the rest set:
Label Symbol Description

Danger

CE marking

RoHS compliance (to be disposed


as an electronic device)
Table 3 - Rear panel symbols
1.1 Connection to the mains
The connection to the mains is performed by plug (19), and by the power
cord, provided.
The following image exhibits the plug (19):

Figure 3 – Rear panel: plug (19)

The power cord has three wires: phase, neutral (or two phases), ground: the
ground is connected to the chassis, and to the ground socket (22).
The following image exhibits the ground socket (22):

Figure 4 – Rear panel: ground socket (22)


After power-on, pressing the push-button (17).
Light (18) confirms that the supply is correct and the device is ON.
If there are problems on the supply, lights (16) turn on; they signal: ground-
missing, supply too high.
The following image exhibits the push-button (17), the light (18) and the
lights (16):

Figure 5 - Front panel: push-button (17), lights (16), light (18)


1.2 Output voltages and currents
Output voltages are connected to sockets (13); the two sockets marked VN
are short-circuited, and are the neutral for the voltages. Neutral sockets VN
are isolated from the current neutral sockets, IN.
Output currents are connected to sockets (14); the two sockets marked IN
are short-circuited, and are the neutral for the currents.
The following image exhibits the sockets (14) and (13):

Figure 6 - Front panel: sockets (14) and (13)


1.3 Auxiliary DC voltage output
The auxiliary DC voltage is connected to sockets (12): red socket for the
positive.
The following image exhibits the sockets (12):

Figure 7 - Front panel: sockets (12)


1.4 Trip inputs or analog inputs and auxiliary outputs
The following image exhibits the trip inputs (7):

Figure 8 - Front panel: trip inputs (7)

Trip inputs (7) are twelve in all, divided in six groups of two inputs each:
groups are isolated among them.
The following table lists the trip inputs (7):
Trip
Description
Input
C1
C2
C3 These inputs are used as trip inputs and, with the
C4 TRANSCOPE option, for the measurement of analog inputs

C5
C6
C7
These inputs are used as trip inputs
C8
This input is used as trip input and, with the TRANSCOPE
C9
option, for the measurement of analog inputs
Table 4 - Trip inputs (7) (1/2)
Trip
Description
Input
C10- This input is used as trip input, counting input and, with the
IMP1 TRANSCOPE option, for the measurement of analog inputs
This input is used as trip input and, with the TRANSCOPE
C11
option, for the measurement of analog inputs
C12- This input is used as trip input, counting input and, with the
IMP2 TRANSCOPE option, for the measurement of analog inputs
Table 5 - Trip inputs (7) (2/2)

Each group can be independently selected with or without voltage.


The following image exhibits the outputs (4):

Figure 9 - Front panel: outputs (4)

Auxiliary outputs (4) are relay contacts; at sockets, the following are
available:
• Common contact
• Normal Open contact
• Normal Closed contact
There are four more auxiliary outputs, transistor type, connected to the rear
round connector (26) (ref. to the Appendix I to see the connector and the
pin configuration).
The following image exhibits the connector (26):

Figure 10 – Rear panel: connector (26)


1.5 Measurement inputs
The following image exhibits the sockets (6) and the fuses (5):

Figure 11 - Front panel: sockets (6) and fuses (5)

Measurement inputs are connected to sockets (6).


The following two measurements are available, exclusive of each other:
• low current
• low voltage
Black sockets are the zero for the voltage or current measurements: they
are short circuited.
Each input is protected by a “T63mA 250V” fuse (5).
1.6 Interface connections
The following table lists the interface connectors of the test set:
Conn. Position Description
This connector is for the
Front optional IEC61850-8
9 interface. When active,
the two lights (21) above
it turn on
This USB connector is for
the test set control via an
10 external PC. When
active, the light above it
turns on
This connector is for the
11
USB flash disk
This optional 32-way
round connector hosts
the connections for:
Rear • external amplifiers
26
and I/O expansion
• low level outputs
• digital outputs zero
power signals
This ETHERNET
connector is for the test
24
set control via an
external PC
These two optical
connectors are for
25
optional IEC61850-9
interface
Table 6 - Test set interface connectors
1.7 Local test set control
The test set can be operated locally or via PC control.
The following table lists the elements that perform the local operation:
Conn. Position Description
Function keys, from F1 to F5. These are
1
breakthrough commands
This color display allows the operator to
2 dialogue with the test set, displaying the
selected parameters and the test results
This knob allows to move on the screen
3 by rotating it; after a selection, confirm it
by pressing the knob
This alpha-numeric keyboard allows data
15
input
Test results can be saved on a FLASH
memory key, which can be fit into this
connector. The TDMS test program allows
to review test results, and to save them
11 permanently into the database. The same
test program allows to set-up tests and to
record them into the memory key, from
which they can be uploaded into the test
set
Table 7 - Local operation elements

During tests, the display informs about the following:


• current and voltage outputs
• trip inputs
• auxiliary outputs
It also displays diagnostic messages that tell the operator the type of
problem and the faulty component. The list of these messages and of the
corresponding corrective action is reported in the Chapter 11.
1.8 Low power outputs
Optional low power outputs, for the simulation of non-conventional current
and voltage transducers, are found on connector (26). Appendix I shows the
connector and the pin configuration.
The following image exhibits the connector (26):

Figure 12 – Rear panel: connector (26)


2 POWER-ON
The test set is to be powered-on setting it horizontally, and with the feet
below lifted.
The following image exhibits the test set with lifted feet:

Figure 13 - Test set with lifted feet

This configuration allows the air leaving it to exit without being slowed down
by the tight room left below it. In alternative, it is possible can lower the
handle and use it to lift the test set some more.
The following image exhibits the optional test set support (use it if the room
is tight and the operator has to operate the test set standing):

Figure 14 - Test set support: closed and opened


The following image exhibits the use of the test set support (there is enough
room for the power supply cord and for the cooling air to flow in):

Figure 15 - Use of the test set support

Before set-up, clean the floor

Before power-on, perform all connections to the relay to be


tested
The following table lists the characteristics of the supply voltage:
Characteristic Value
90÷132 V AC
Range
180÷264 V AC

Shape Sinusoidal

Single phase (the supply can be Phase–


Neutral or Phase to Phase, but the
Phase
ground connection must be available in
the supply plug)
Table 8 - Supply voltage characteristics

The following table lists the step necessary to power-on the test set:
Step Description Scheme/Display
Fit the power supply cable in
the rear plug (19):
the test set generates an
1
auxiliary, low power supply that
puts the test set in a stand-by
situation

At power-on, the light (16)


above starts blinking: this
2 confirms that the test set is
performing the voltage supply
diagnostic

After about ten seconds, the light turns off: the diagnostic is
completed, and the test set is ready to be powered-on. If the
3 power cord is fit without powering-on, fans can start turning and
stop after a short while: the cooling system detects some high
temperature, and starts operating when necessary
Table 9 - Steps for power-on the test set (1/3)
Step Description Scheme/Display

Press the push button (17) for


4
some seconds.

The following image appears on


5
the display:

The test set starts a self-


diagnostic procedure, board
after board: the progress is
6 shown on the display. If some
board is found to be wrong or
missing (like the Booster, the
IEC options), it is shown in grey

Table 10 - Steps for power-on the test set (2/3)


Step Description Scheme/Display
When the test set is ready, the
light (18) turns on: this confirms
that the microprocessor
operates correctly. If there is a
fault sensed on an amplifier
(current, AC voltage, DC
7
voltage), there is a message on
the display, plus the buzzer
beeping. In this situation, the
display will inform about the
problem, and about the faulty
board
Table 11 - Steps for power-on the test set (3/3)
3 CONNECTION TO THE RELAY
RELAY

Connect the relay before powering-on the test set

Power-off the test set before connecting another relay

3.1 Burden
Before executing a test with the DRTS XX, it is necessary to check that the
burdens of the relay under test are compatible with the DRTS XX voltage and
current output power, at the desired test current or voltage.
To this purpose, it is necessary to compare the burden declared by the
manufacturer to the maximum loads.

Often, the relay burden is expressed in terms of VAload at nominal voltage or


current: it is necessary to convert it into Ohm, with the following formulas:



 
 

 

 


3.2 Current outputs
Currents are connected to safety sockets (14).
The following image exhibits the safety sockets (14):

Figure 16 - Front panel: safety sockets (14)

The two neutral sockets are connected together. If up to three currents are,
generated one socket is enough; if more currents are generated, it is
advisable to use both sockets.
Before the first voltage test, the test set measures the voltage
at the voltage sockets: if a voltage above 25 V is measured, the
test cannot be executed, and the operator is warned by a
counter-feed alarm

Next, the test set measures the burden of the relay under test.
The normal practice is to connect the DRTS XX to the relay
under test without disconnecting the secondary side of the
Current Transformer. This is possible because the C.T. has
opened the primary side and therefore, it exhibits very high
impedance. In conclusion, as this connection saves time, and
it is possible to use it, unless in case of error

Before starting any test, the set verifies that the burden is not too high at
that current.
The following table lists the effects of too high burden:
Case Description Effect
The output can be generated
If the test lasts less than the
during a maximum duration, that
1 maximum duration, the user
is a function of current and
will not notice anything
burden
It is necessary to modify the
The output cannot be generated situation: shorter or thicker
2 without causing the overload cables, or lower test current
alarm intervention (also in case of duration
longer than the maximum)
Table 12 - Effects of too high burden

If the test causes an overload, the test set generates a fault signal as soon as
the output has an error in excess of 5% of the nominal output.
This logic error is delayed in order to avoid faults caused by the relay itself
(for instance as metering circuits are switched). For this reason, if test
duration is very short (as during the test of first zone settings in distance
relays), the overload signal can be not sensed.
In this situation, test result can be different from the nominal setting.
Therefore, if test result is very different with respect to the nominal, before
proceeding, test that there is no overload, with a test duration more than
0.3 s.
Some older relays (for instance, electromechanical distance relays), have a
transient high impedance, which decreases after the fault has been
recognized. In this situation, the test set could signal that the impedance is
too high, and inhibit to perform the test at the desired test current.
In this situation, it is necessary to force the value of the measured
impedance, as follows:
• Disconnect Manual: reach the front panel, and select “Auxiliary
settings”. The following image exhibits the Main Control Screen:

Figure 17 - Main Control Screen

• Select “Use as Default Burden”, and input the impedance at the


given test current. The following image exhibits the window in
which select, for example, 0.4 Ohm at 32 A:

Figure 18 - Auxiliary Voltage/Burden Settings


• Go to the test program, and perform the test: the impedance is no
more measured, and there is no overload message
• The consequence is that the current is something less than the
nominal value, but with older relays this is not a big problem

3.2.1 Current outputs independently used (mode 6I)


The following image exhibits the connection due to current outputs used
independently:

Figure 19 - Mode 6I

The following table lists the supply characteristics of the DRTS XX:
Supply Maximum power Note
Per phase steady on any
230 V 430 VA output, in single or dual
phase generation

110 V 300 VA Per phase


Table 13 - Supply characteristic of the DRTS XX

The specified maximum power is available at maximum current, and then it


decreases with the current.
The following table lists the TDMS settings with a six-phase generation per
32 A selection:
Connection Current Phase angle
I1 ^ = 0°
I2 ^ = 240°
I3 ^ = 120°
32 A
I4 ^ = 0°
I5 ^ = 240°
I6 ^ = 120°
Table 14 – 6I TDMS settings

The following table lists the maximum power and the maximum burdens, as
a function of the test current and of the number of output currents at the
meantime, (test duration is 3 s (minimum)):
Test current (A)
Output 32 24 16 8
currents Max Max Max Max Max Max Max Max
power burden power burden power burden power burden
(VA) (Zmx) (VA) (Zmx) (VA) (Zmx) (VA) (Zmx)

Output 1I 430 0.4 360 0.62 240 0.9 120 1.8

Output 2I 430 0.4 360 0.62 240 0.9 120 1.8

Output 3I
@ 120°
400 0.39 360 0.62 240 0.9 120 1.8

Output 6I
@ 120°
100 0.1 160 0.27 200 0.78 120 1.8
Table 15 – 6I Max power and max burden

The table applies with a voltage supply of 230 V. With the


supply of 115 V, as the mains supply current is the same, the
maximum power is halved. This means that there is no change
when generating one, two or three outputs at the meantime
Special care is to be taken when evaluating the burden of the
current input, as the burden of connecting wires, is to be added
to the relay burden. If the relay load is 2 VA at the nominal
current of 5 A, the relay burden is 80 mΩ.
In this case it is possible to test at 32 A in three phase only, if
the connection and cabling are maximum 8 m long, with a cross
section of 2.5 mm2, and if cables are tied together, in order to
minimize the reactive component

3.2.2 Paralleling two outputs


The following image exhibits a parallel configuration of two outputs:

Figure 20 - Two outputs in parallel

This configuration is a three-phase generator with currents up to 64 A (in


the software, mode 3x64). The output currents are connected in parallel:
• I1 to I4
• I2 to I5
• I3 to I6
The program accepts test currents up to 64 A, and takes care to drive half-
and-half the amplifiers, and to display the total current on the display and
in the test report.
The following table lists the maximum burdens (1*2P means the generation
of two paralleled outputs only, and 3*2P means the generation of all
outputs):
Test current (A)

Output 32 24 16 8
currents Max Max Max Max Max Max Max Max
power burden power burden power burden power burden
(VA) (Zmx) (VA) (Zmx) (VA) (Zmx) (VA) (Zmx)

Output
1*2P
860 0.2 760 0.3 660 0.3 540 0.3

Output
3*2P
160 0.04 240 0.07 320 0.13 400 0.25
Table 16 – 2P Max power and max burden

For other currents, to compute the maximum burden, average the available
power, and then divide it with the square of the current.

 
At 44 A the power is the following:  360 


The maximum burden is the following:  0.18 
 
The following table lists the phase angles with the 6*32 A selection, or with
the 3*64 A selection:

Phase Phase
Connection Current Connection Current
angle angle
I1 32 A ^ = 0° I1 64 A ^ = 0°
I2 32 A ^ = 240° I2 64 A ^ = 240°
I3 32 A ^ = 120° I3 64 A ^ = 120°
I4 32 A ^ = 0°
I5 32 A ^ = 240°
I6 32 A ^ = 120°
Table 17 – 2P TDMS settings

3.2.3 All currents in parallel


The following image exhibits a complete parallel configuration of the
outputs:

Figure 21 – Parallel connection

This configuration allows to run tests at even higher currents or output


power, and to perform single-phase tests up to 128 A. The angle between
currents must be 0°; the current amplitude must be the same.
For other currents, to compute the maximum burden, average the available
power, and then divide it with the square of the current.

!"
At 88 A the power is the following:  745 

&!
The maximum burden is the following:  0.096 
""

The following table lists the maximum burdens (6P stays for six outputs in
parallel, and 3P means three currents in parallel (DRTS 34 and 33)):
Test current (A)

Output 128 96 80 64
currents Max Max Max Max Max Max Max Max
power burden power burden power burden power burden
(VA) (Zmx) (VA) (Zmx) (VA) (Zmx) (VA) (Zmx)

Output 6P 650 0.04 650 0.07 840 0.13 900 0.24

Output 3P 650 0.07 840 0.13 900 0.24


Table 18 – Parallel max power and max burden

Phase angles are all in phase; the phase current at 128 A total is 21.33 A.
With this connection, current increases, but the maximum burden
decreases, as summarized in the previous table.

In these instances, please take care of the connection and of


test duration: the two 4 mm sockets of IN are at limit when
delivering 128 A for more than few seconds.
Use both neutral sockets in parallel, and an adequate (bigger
than possible) wire size, such that connection sockets are not
damaged because of over-heating and the burden is
minimized
3.2.4 Series connection
The following image exhibits the amplifiers series connection, due to the
necessity to have more than 420 VA at 32 A:

Figure 22 - Series connection

The angle between currents must be 180°; the amplitude of two currents
must be the same.

" & 
At 28 A the power is the following:  770 

&&
The maximum burden is the following:  0.98 
"

For other currents, to compute the maximum burden, average the available
power, and then divide it with the square of the current.
The following table lists the maximum burdens:
Test current (A)

Output 32 24 16 8
currents Max Max Max Max Max Max Max Max
power burden power burden power burden power burden
(VA) (Zmx) (VA) (Zmx) (VA) (Zmx) (VA) (Zmx)

Output
1*I+I
820 0.8 720 1.2 480 1.8 240 3.7
Table 19 – Series max power and max burden
In this instance, it is possible to have up to 820 VA at 32 A, that is, to double
the power at 32 A.
The following table lists the TDMS settings with a six-phase generation per
32 A selection:
Connection Current Phase angle
I1 ^ = 0°
I2 ^ = 240°
I3 ^ = 120°
32 A
I4 ^ = 180°
I5 ^ = 60°
I6 ^ = 300°
Table 20 – Series TDMS settings

Use this setting only if the power of a single output is not


enough because of a too high burden

3.2.5 Two in parallel in series to two in parallel (2P S 2P)


The following image exhibits the connection of two amplifiers in parallel,
connected in series with two other amplifiers in parallel, due to the necessity
to have more than 860 VA at 64 A:

Figure 23 – 2P S 2P connection
The angle of the first two is 0°, the angle of the second two must be 180°;
the amplitude of currents must be the same.

For other currents, to compute the maximum burden, average the available
power, and then divide it with the square of the current.

"
At 44 A the power is the following:  700 

&
The maximum burden is the following:  0.36 
 

The following table lists the maximum burdens:


Test current (A)

Output 64 56 48 40
currents Max Max Max Max Max Max Max Max
power burden power burden power burden power burden
(VA) (Zmx) (VA) (Zmx) (VA) (Zmx) (VA) (Zmx)

Output
2PS2P
900 0.21 1,000 0.32 800 0.35 600 0.37
Table 21 - 2P S 2P Max power and max burden

The following table lists the TDMS setting with a six-phase generation per
32 A selection:
Connection Current Phase angle
I1 32 A ^ = 0°
I2 0 N.A.
I3 32 A ^ = 0°
I4 32 A ^ = 180°
I5 0 N.A.
I6 32 A ^ = 180°
Table 22 – 2P S 2P TDMS settings
3.2.6 DC generation
The following image exhibits the DC generation connection:

Figure 24 - DC generation connection

The following table lists the maximum current and power for generating one
or more DC current output:
Test current (A)

Output 32 28 24 16
currents Max Max Max Max Max Max Max Max
power burden power burden power burden power burden
(VA) (Zmx) (VA) (Zmx) (VA) (Zmx) (VA) (Zmx)

1 output 220 0.21 200 0.25 170 0.29 110 0.42


Table 23 – One or more DC current output: max power and max burden

The following table lists the maximum current and power for all outputs in
parallel with DC current:
Test current (A)

Output 85 60 40
currents Max Max Max Max Max Max
power burden power burden power burden
(VA) (Zmx) (VA) (Zmx) (VA) (Zmx)
All in
parallel
630 0.09 480 0.13 330 0.2
Table 24 – All in parallel with DC current: max power and max burden
3.3 Low current ranges: IN2-
IN2-CDG option
With DRTS XX the full power is available only at the current of 32 A. This is
good for the test of relays with the nominal current of 5 A; if relays are rated
1 A, the available power can be not adequate to perform the test of high
burden relays. In addition to this, some old electromechanical relays (as CDG
of GE) have very low nominal current settings; this implies having high VA
rating at low currents.
The following image exhibits the IN2-CDG device:

Figure 25 - IN2-CDG device

The external option IN2-CDG solves these problems, by means of a set of


three current transformers.
The following table lists the characteristics of the IN2-CDG option:
ITEM Characteristic
1 Primary: 12.5 A and 15 A
Secondary:
• 0.5 A
2 • 1A
• 2.5 A
• 5A
3 Nominal power: 100 VA
4 Power loss: 30 VA at maximum current
5 Current ratio error: 0.2
Connections:
• Seven primary side sockets (I1(12.5 A), I2 (12.5 A), I3
6 (12.5 A), I1(15 A), I2 (15 A), I3 (15 A), IN)
• Three independent outputs, with one phase socket per
current range and two zero sockets
For the single phase tests it is possible to have three times the
7
above power, connecting current outputs in series
Table 25 - IN2-CDG option characteristics

The following table lists the maximum output voltage and burden vs output
current:
Iout (A) Vmax (V) Loadmax (Ohm)
0.5 200 400
1 100 100
2.5 40 16
5 20 4
Table 26 - Iout vs Vmax and Loadmax
0.5 A and 1 A outputs may have a dangerous voltage: don’t
touch the connections during generation

The option includes four connecting cables to DRTS XX current outputs, 1 m


long, 2.5 mm2 cross section. A bridge is included for star connection. The
test program TDMS accepts the transformer ratio, so those currents can be
programmed with their value after the option.
The following image exhibits the connection between the DRTS XX and the
relay under test:

Figure 26 – DRTS XX and relay connection via IN2-CDG option

Remember to select in the Preferences of the test program


that the IN2-CDG option is used
3.4 High power, single phase outputs: HPB 400 and HPB 600
To boost the current output power, there are two possible external options
(current transformers):
• HPB 400
• HPB 600
The two reasons for the use of the previous options are the following:
• Old electromechanical relays have high burdens
• The burden is the same for relays rated 1 A or 5 A
Those reasons can be a problem for the test set, because of the output
power decreases linearly with the output current.

The following table lists the main characteristics of a high


burden relay:
Burden Current Impedance
1A 0.8 Ohm
20 VA
5A 20 Ohm
The following graph exhibits the linear characteristics of the DRTS XX power
curve:

Figure 27 - Linear characteristics of the DRTS XX power curve

There is 430 VA at 32 A, and a linearly decreasing power for lower currents.


The following table lists the data related with the previous graph:

I [A] P [VA] Z [Ohm] V [V]

0,5 6.72 26.88 13.44

1 13.44 13.44 13.44

2 26.88 6.72 13.44

4 53.75 3.36 13.44

10 134.8 1.34 13.44

20 268.75 0.672 13.44

32 430 0.42 13.44


Table 27 - Linear characteristics data
The table highlights the following two observations:
1. The 5 A relay model can be tested at current less than 20 A, which
can be OK for distance relays, but bad for over-current relays
2. The 1 A relay model cannot be tested
The HPB 400 and HPB 600 options offer the solution.
The following image exhibits the HPB 400 option:

Figure 28 - HPB 400 option

The following table lists the characteristics of the HPB 400 option:

Current I [A] P [VA]

Primary Current 32 430

Secondary 1 20 370

Secondary 2 4 300

Secondary 3 1 300
Table 28 - HPB 400 option characteristics
The following graph exhibits the linear characteristics of the DRTS XX +
HPB 400 option power curve:

Figure 29 – Linear char. of DRTS XX + HPB 400 option power curve

The following image exhibits the HPB 600 option:

Figure 30 - HPB 600 option


The following table lists the features of the HPB 600 option:

Current I [A] P [VA]

Primary Current 32 430

Secondary 1 20 600

Secondary 2 10 500

Secondary 3 4 400

Secondary 4 1 400
Table 29 - HPB 600 option characteristics

The following graph exhibits the linear characteristics of the DRTS XX + HPB
600 option power curve:

Figure 31 - Linear char. of DRTS XX + HPB 600 option power curve


The following tables resume the data for the DRTS XX and the HPB options:
DRTSXX HPB 400 20 A HPB 600 20 A HPB 600 10 A
I
[A] P Z V P Z V P Z V P Z V
[VA] [Ohm] [V] [VA] [Ohm] [V] [VA] [Ohm] [V] [VA] [Ohm] [V]
0,5 6,72 26,88 13,44 9,25 37 18,5 15 60 30 25 100 50

1 13,44 13,44 13,44 18,5 18,5 18,5 30 30 30 50 50 50

2 26,88 6,72 13,44 37 9,25 18,5 60 15 30 100 25 50

4 53,75 3,36 13,44 74 4,63 18,5 120 7,5 30 200 12,5 50

10 134,38 1,34 13,44 185 1,85 18,5 300 3 30 500 5 50

20 268,75 0,68 13,44 370 0,93 18,5 600 1,5 30

32 430 0,42 13,44


Table 30 - DRTS XX and the HPB options (1/2)

HPB 400 4 A HPB 600 4 A HPB 400 1 A HPB 600 1 A


I
[A] P Z V P Z V Z V P Z V
[VA] [Ohm] [V] [VA] [Ohm] [V] [VA] [Ohm] [V] [VA] [Ohm] [V]
0,5 37,5 150 75 50 200 100 150 600 300 200 800 400

1 75 75 75 100 100 100 300 300 300 400 400 400

2 150 37,5 75 200 50 100

4 300 18,75 75 400 25 100


Table 31 - DRTS XX and the HPB options (2/2)

The maximum impedance increases using the HPB options.


Coming back to the initial example, with the HPB options, it is possible to
drive the impedance and the following table lists the related value:
5 A Relay HPB HPB 1 A Relay HPB HPB 1 A Relay HPB
model 400 600 model 400 600 model 600
I Z Z Z I Z Z Z I Z Z
[A] [Ohm] [Ohm] [Ohm] [A] [Ohm] [Ohm] [Ohm] [A] [Ohm] [Ohm]
20 0.8 0.9 1.5 2 20 37.5 50 1 20 25
Table 32 – Impedance related to the use of HPB 400 and 600 options

The HPB options solve the problem of testing even very high impedance, or
old-fashioned relays.
The HPB options also allow to test low current relays (i.e. GE’s CDG). In fact,
the available power at 1 A and at 0.5 A is more than the power of the IN2-
CDG option.
The following image exhibits the HPB 400 option connection (the output is
connected with 20 A range):

Figure 32 - HPB 400 option connection

The following image exhibits the HPB 600 option connection (two current
outputs are used to boost the power):

Figure 33 - HPB 600 option connection

Connect only an output at a time

Don’t leave unused connections to the secondary side (two


parallel current paths mean an error of the output current)
During the operation, even when they are not connected,
outputs 4 A and 1 A can have dangerous voltages: up to 75 or
100 V for the 4 A output, and up to 300 V or 400 V for the 1 A
output
Don’t touch them

The following table lists the necessary steps before to start a test with the
HPB 600 option:
Step Description
Prior to testing, the test set has to measure the burden.
Connect DRTS XX I1 to the HPB 600 I1 socket, and DRTS XX IN
to the HPB 600 I2 socket
1 NOTE: with this connection, the maximum power
is the half; however, for tests at 1 A, 4 A and, very
likely, also the others currents, this power is
usually more than enough
Program a current half of the nominal one, and start a test:
2
the test set inject it, and keep the measured burden
Try to generate the nominal current: only if the burden is too
3
high, proceed with the next step
For the maximum power, connect I1 and I2 only to the
4 corresponding red sockets: IN is not used. Program I1 and I2
with the same amplitude, but I2 is at 180°
Perform the tests, taking care to have always I1 and I2 equal,
5
and at 180°; else, they would signal overload
Table 33 - steps before to start a test with the HPB 600 option

Using two HPB 400 options, it is possible to connect them to a DRTS XX, in
series or in parallel (to double the output power of that range).
The following images exhibit the series connection:

Figure 34 - HPB 400 options: series connection

The following table list the main data for the series connection:

Power [VA] Output current [A]

740 20
Table 34 - Characteristics of the HPB 400 option in series
The following images exhibit the parallel connection:

Figure 35 - HPB option: parallel connection

The following table list the main data for the parallel connection:

Power [VA] Output current [A]

740 40
Table 35 - Characteristics of the HPB 400 option in parallel
The following procedures exhibit how to program the actual test current
coming from the HPB 400, or the HPB 600 boosters, instead of the primary
current:
Manual Control
Step Description Scheme

Select the “Manual


1 Control” option in
the main menu

Select “Settings”

2
Then select
“Advanced Settings”
Select “Other
Options”
3
Then put a tick to
the “Use CT” option

Select “32” in the


“Primary Side”
4 drop-menu

Select one value in


the “Secondary
Side” drop-menu.

5
The program
computes the CT
ratio (1.6 in the
example)
Table 36 - Manual Control procedure
Distance ANSI 21
Step Description Scheme

Select the “Distance 21”


1
option in the main menu

In the page “Network”,


put a tick to the “INI
CDG” option and select
2
the ratio from the drop-
menu (32//20 in the
example)

Table 37 - Distance ANSI 21 procedure


Overcurrent ANSI 50-51 67; Differential 87
Step Description Scheme

Select the
“Overcurrent 50-51
67” option or
1 “Differential 87”
option in the main
menu

Select “Options”

2
Then select
“Preferences”
Put a tick to the
“Use CT” option

Then select “32” in


the “Primary Side”
3 drop-menu

Then select one


value in the
“Secondary Side”
drop-menu
Table 38 - Overcurrent ANSI 50-51 68 and Differential 87 procedure
3.5 Delta connection of current outputs

In case it is necessary to test a differential transformer relay


protections, where one side has a Delta connection and the
compensator is included in the relay, this connection can
overload the test set current amplifiers and it can damage
them

The following image exhibits the Delta connection of current outputs:

Figure 36 - Delta connection of current outputs

The test can start only if the three currents are equal in value, and phase
shifted by 120°; else, the test set would immediately generate an over-load
fault alarm. If currents are the same, the test sets are so accurate that each
current closes its path on the other two, and no alarm is generated.
The following image exhibits the three currents:

Figure 37 - Three output currents


3.6 Voltage outputs
Voltages are connected to safety sockets (13) for the DRTS 66 model. The
DRTS 64 and 34 models have four sockets; the DRTS 33 model has three
sockets.
The following image exhibits the safety sockets (13):

Figure 38 - Front panel: safety sockets (13)

Using the TDMS program, the selection of one of the following three is
possible:

1. ((((() as a fourth voltage


4
((((() ((((() ((((()
*+* *
2. 4 is the zero-sequence voltage as vector sum: ((((()
((((() 0 

((((() ((((() ((((()
*+* *
3. 4 is the zero-sequence voltage as vector sum: ((((()
((((() 0 
√

The zero-sequence voltage selection (case 3) can be higher


than 300 V: the test set gives an error alarm message

((((() is to test relays that need the zero sequence voltage along
Purpose of 0
with three phase voltages. For this purpose, the 4 ((((() selection is applicable;
(((((), ((((()
((((() from 1
otherwise, the user should compute 4 2 and ((((()
3 with the above
formula.
(((((). The neutral of ((((()
For normal use, select 4 4 is VN.
((((() and 6
(((((), 5
Purpose of 4 ((((() is to test relays that need an independent set of
voltages; example is the synchronization relay.
The socket VN is isolated from sockets IN and the zero of the auxiliary DC
supply voltage (12).
The following image exhibits the auxiliary DC supply voltage (12):

Figure 39 - Front panel: auxiliary DC supply voltage (12)

Before the first voltage test, the test set measures the voltage
at the voltage sockets: if a voltage above 25 V is measured, the
test cannot be executed, and the operator is warned by a
counter-feed alarm
If the test causes an overload, the test set generates a fault signal as soon as
the output has an error in excess of 5% of the nominal output. This logic
error is delayed in order to avoid faults caused by the relay itself (for
instance as metering circuits are switched). For this reason, if test duration
is very short (as during the test of first zone settings in distance relays), the
overload signal can be not sensed: in this situation, test result can be
different from the nominal setting. Therefore, if test result is very different
with respect to the nominal, before proceeding, test that there is no
overload, with a test duration more than 0.3 s.
Tests with separate outputs
The following table lists the values of the maximum power and burdens:
Test voltage (A)

Output 300 125 62.5


voltages Max Max Max Max Max Max
power burden power burden power burden
(VA) (Zmx) (VA) (Zmx) (VA) (Zmx)
Output 6x 50 1800 50 320 25 160
Output 4x 85 1060 85 200 40 100
Output 3x 100 900 100 160 50 80
Table 39 – Voltage outputs: max power and max burden

The maximum power is constant between 300 V and 125 V; then, it


decreases linearly with the output voltage.

Series connection
The following image exhibits the series connection for the voltage outputs:

Figure 40 – Voltage outputs: series connection

It is possible to double the output voltage by connecting the burden


between two outputs that are phase shifted at 180°.
The following table lists the instance burdens:
Test voltage (A)

Output 300 125 62.5


voltages Max Max Max Max Max Max
power burden power burden power burden
(VA) (Zmx) (VA) (Zmx) (VA) (Zmx)

Output 200 1,800 200 320 100 160


Table 40 - Instance burdens

It is impossible to connect in series more than 2 voltage generators:


in the relay, the neutral is the same for all phases. Connecting the
output V1 to the relay input VA, and the output V2 (=-V1) to the relay
input VN, then, it is not possible to connect the relay input VB to the
output V3, and relay input VN to the output V4 (=-V3). It causes a
short circuit between test set outputs V2 and V4. It is possible only if
voltage inputs have 2 wires for each voltage input, (it is not so usual)

Parallel connection
Putting two outputs in parallel, the power increases and it can be doubled.
This connection applies only to single-phase test.
The following image exhibits the parallel connection for the voltage outputs

Figure 41 - Voltage outputs: parallel connection

With three-phase test, it is impossible to double the output power. In fact,


looking at the table 39, if all outputs are used, each output has a power of
50 VA at 300 V, and this is the same power connecting three outputs only.
3.7 AC voltage relay auxiliary supply
In some relays, the auxiliary voltage is an AC voltage rather than a DC
voltage. In this instance the AC voltage generator can be used to feed the
relay; however, this must be performed with some care.
The first check to perform is about the power consumption.

With reference to the above Table 39, the maximum relay


consumption should be no more than one fifth of the
maximum power.
Note: with an AC supply, the load is usually made of a
rectifying bridge plus a filter capacitor. With this circuit, the
consumption is concentrated on the 2 ms of the voltage peak;
therefore, the current is five times as higher than the one
expected

The following image exhibits the electric scheme and the trend of voltage
and current for an AC current:

Figure 42 - AC current
Nominal voltage = 100 V AC
Power consumption = 10 VA
It is possible to calculate the following:
+ *.
Current sink = = 0.1 A
+ *
Current peak = 0.5 A (due to the concentration of current)
Real power consumption = 0.5 / 100  50 instead of
10 VA
When the voltage is first applied to the relay, the filter
capacitor is a short-circuit
Note: the test set overload signal is delayed by about 60 ms to
overcome transient situations; during this time, the capacitor
is loaded, at the maximum current yield of the amplifier: if at
the end of 60 ms the capacitor is not yet charged, DRTS XX
signals a fault on voltage output

The solution for the previous problem is to increase slowly the voltage
supply, and to keep it constant during the test; the following table lists the
steps related to this solution:
Step Description
1 Go to pre-fault definition, and program a low voltage, i.e. 5 V
Press Apply pre-fault values: 5 V are generated. Thanks to the
2
low voltage, the current is limited
3 Program 10 V and generate them
Continue with 10 V steps, until the reaching of the desired
4
voltage supply
Go to the fault definition, and program the same value for the
5
voltage
Perform the tests

6 Do not use the reset button, as it takes to zero all


outputs, and the sequence should be repeated

Table 41 – Procedure for slowing increase the voltage supply


Conclusions:
• Compute the power sink (maximum available power from the test
set is one fifth of the specified one)
• Apply the voltage slowly

If the auxiliary DC voltage generator is broken, and the relay


auxiliary supply has to be feed with a DC voltage, use a voltage
output, selected at 0 Hz
Note: Apply the voltage slowly; else, the amplifier signals
overload
3.8 Battery simulator
The battery simulator is available on safety sockets (12), and is isolated with
respect to voltages and currents.
The following image exhibits the safety sockets (12):

Figure 43 - Front panel: safety sockets (12)

The DC voltage can be used to supply the relay under test or to polarize trip
contacts. The test set accepts any value between 0 and the maximum, but
does not generate outputs less than 12 V.
Before test start and when the voltage is zero, the output is zero. If a
counter-feed voltage is erroneously connected, the error is sensed and
reported on the test program as counter-feed on DC supply. The voltage
must be removed for the test to continue.
The DC voltage generator can yield at maximum 50 W or 1 A, whichever
greater: therefore, the maximum load is a function of the supply voltage
range.
The following table lists the maximum load (minimum resistance), for the
most used voltages:
V DC [V] R max [Ohm]
260 1400
220 1000
110 250
48 50
24 24
Table 42 - Maximum loads for the most used voltages

For the DC voltage, pay attention to the input filter capacitor: this is a short
circuit as the voltage is applied. When connected to this type of load, the
instrument drives 1 A for the maximum time of 0.5 s; after this, the
instrument signals over-load.
At 110 V the DRTS XX can drive a capacitor of 1000 µF; bigger values can
cause an overload alarm. In this instance, it can be enough to reduce the
voltage.
3.9 Trip inputs
The following image exhibits the trip inputs (7):

Figure 44 - Front panel: trip inputs (7)

Trip inputs (7) are separated in six groups, with isolated zero references:
• C1 – C2
• C3 – C4
• C5 – C6
• C7 – C8
• C9 – C10 (IMP1)
• C11 – C12 (IMP2)
A cable with six banana connectors is provided for the case that the
reference is the same for all inputs.

If the TRANSCOPE option is present, inputs are reduced to ten,


and they are the following: C1 to C6; C9 to C12.
C7 and C8 are not connected

The selection of input voltage clean or under voltage is performed on the


healthy values, together with other selections: de-bounce time and value of
input voltage.
If the input is voltage, clean the program selects automatically the threshold
of 24 V, while the voltage wetting the contacts is 12 V.
If the input is under voltage, select 5 V for logical inputs, or the nominal
voltage of the site.
In case the 5 V level is selected with a voltage of 110 V, trip delays can be
slightly modified; however, circuits is not damaged.
If the selection is voltage clean while contacts are with voltage, the contact
can be seen closed while it is open; anyway, no error occurs.
The following table summarizes the nominal voltage and the corresponding
nominal threshold:
Vnom [V] Vnom threshold [Ohm]
5 4.5
24 22
48 42
> 100 80
Table 43 - Nominal voltage and threshold

The following image exhibits the reason for a voltage threshold:

Figure 45 - Reason for a voltage threshold

The resistor R has the purpose to protect the contact or to diagnose if the
CB coil is open. Therefore, the voltage at C1 is not going from zero (open
contact) to +SUPPLY (closed contact); instead, it goes from the partitioning,
made by resistor R and the coil resistance, to +SUPPLY.
The problem is solved by selecting a threshold higher than the partitioning
voltage, so that the open contact voltage is sensed as zero level.

Sometimes the auxiliary supply is 220 V, but actually, it is


±110 V. In this case, when the black socket is connected to the
zero, the input is always sensed closed, and this is correct,
because the input is either -110 V, or +110 V. The solution, in
this case, is to connect the black socket to -110 V

The threshold voltage is the same for all contacts of the same group; the
thresholds of the groups can be independently set.
De-bounce is the time during which the input must be confirmed before
being accepted as true; this selection is taken into account by the program,
so that trip time does not change with this parameter. The importance of
this setting is that spurious noise can be ignored with high settings; on the
other side, fast trip times cannot be measured with high settings. The
default value of 500 µs is normally a good compromise. If the input is AC
voltage, the program selects automatically the de-bounce delay of 2 ms, in
order to avoid stopping on the zero crossings of the input.
The display informs if the input is open or closed: this applies both with local
and with PC control.
3.10 Energy meters testing
The energy meter test is performed using the Energy Meters test program.
For the details of the program, please refer to the corresponding manual.
The program uses the input sockets marked IMP1 using DRTS XX as the
sample source, and IMP1 plus IMP2 for the tests with a reference energy
meter.
DRTS XX outputs are accurate enough to test class 0.1 energy meters.

As the counting input operates at high frequency, make sure


that there is no bounce in the input, as otherwise they would
be counted

The following image exhibits the connection scheme between DRTS XX and
energy meter (the DRTS XX is the reference):

Figure 46 - Energy meter under test with the DRTSXX as the reference
For higher accuracy, it is possible to use a sample energy meter as the
reference. The two meters, energy and under test, are to be connected so
that they see exactly the same current and the same voltage.

Take care of voltage drops

The following image exhibits the connection scheme between DRTS XX and
energy meter (with a sample meter as the reference):

Figure 47 – Energy meter under test with an energy meter as the reference
The test can be eased taking advantage of the optional SHA 2003 reading
head. In this case, the option should be located in front of the meter under
test.
The following image exhibits the SHA 2003 option respect to the meter
under test:

Figure 48 - SHA 2003 option position

The reading head can be used for rotating disk meters, and for meters with
an LED signaling light, that can be red, but not green or blue.
For rotating disk meters, power-on the head, and press the Disk or LED
Switch to the left. Then, mount the scanning head so that the green light is
lighting the rotating disk.
Next, start the Energy Meter program, select the Manual test to feed the
meter, and move the adjustment knob so that the LED on the head front
blinks as the mark is passing below the head: the clockwise knob rotation
increases the detector sensitivity. Now the system is ready to perform the
desired test.
Power-on the head, and press the Disk or LED Switch to the left. Then,
mount the scanning head so that the green light from the head is lighting
the meter LED; then, release the Disk or LED Switch: the light is removed.
Next, start the Energy Meter program, select the Manual test to feed the
meter, and move the adjustment knob so that the LED on the head front
blinks as the meter LED is blinking: the clockwise knob rotation increases the
sensitivity. Now the system is ready to perform the desired test.

Some energy meters have a 3-pin internal connection.


The following image exhibits this connection:

In this situation, there is a common point between I and V


inputs: it is pin 1. This pin must be connected to IN and to VN
with two separate wires: with this connection, there is no
danger of an error because of the voltage drop caused by the
current.
The following image exhibits this connection:
3.11 Auxiliary outputs
The test set includes two types of auxiliary outputs: relay and, optionally,
transistor. Relay outputs are connected to sockets (4); transistor outputs are
connected to the 32-way rear connector (26). Pin-out assignment and
disposition are shown in Appendix I.
The following image exhibits the sockets (4) and the 32-way connector (26):

Figure 49 - Sockets (4) and 32-way connector (26)

The difference between the two is that the relay operation has a nominal
delay of 5 to 8 ms in closing, and of 4 ms to 6 ms in opening, while the
transistor operation has a maximum delay of 50 µs with respect to the
current and voltage fault injection. Both outputs are operated via software;
their operation can be timed with respect to fault injection.
For relay outputs, the relay under test is connected to sockets (4), either to
the Normal Closed or to the Normal Open contact. Relay outputs are voltage
free, and can be polarized if necessary. Contact rating is the following:
• maximum voltage 250 V AC
• maximum current 5 A
These contacts are foreseen to drive loads such as coils; to avoid EMI noise
interference, contacts are protected by a capacitor and by a MOV rated 500
V AC. However, to drive coils that are externally protected against voltage
spikes when the coil is opened is good practice.
Transistor outputs are four, and have the following characteristics: open
collector, 24 V, 5 mA. There is a protection against short-circuit and for
voltages more than 24 V.
Do not go behind the above limits

The display informs if the output is open or closed: this applies both with
local and with PC control.
3.12 Low level signals
Low-level signal outputs are optionally available on connector (26); pin
assignment and disposition are reported in Appendix I.
The following image exhibits the 32-way connector (26):

Figure 50 - 32-way connector (26)

Purpose of this output is to use external amplifiers, or to test relays


connected to voltage dividers and to Rogowsky coils.
In the software manual test set control, go to Preferences. Then, select the
Zero Power. Program maximum voltages up to 500 V and maximum currents
up to 500 A.
The corresponding secondary voltage can also be programmed; the
maximum RMS value is 7.24 V, corresponding to 10.24 V peak. The voltage
output is scaled according to primary and secondary voltage selections.

Max Primary current = 100 A


Max secondary voltage = 7 V
&
Generate 20 A => Low level voltage = + = 1.4 V
0 
3.13 Measurement inputs
The following table lists the measurement inputs characteristics:
Measurement input Range Use
Test transducer
5 mA DC
outputs with 0÷5 mA
Current
Test transducer
20 mA DC
outputs with 4÷20 mA
Test transducer
Voltage 10 V DC
outputs with 10 V
Table 44 - Measurement inputs characteristics

Both inputs are protected against over-currents and voltages respectively by


fuses (5).
The following image exhibits the measurement inputs (6) and the fuses (5):

Figure 51 - Measurement inputs (6) and fuses (5)

Connect converter inputs to DRTS XX current and voltage outputs, and


converter output to the measurement input.
Start the manual or automatic test and verify the error of the converter.
4 CONNECTION TO THE PC
It is possible to connect the test set with the PC using the USB connector
(10) or the connector (24) for the ETHERNET.
The following image exhibits the USB connector (10) and the ETHERNET
connector (24):

Figure 52 - USB connector (10) and ETHERNET connector (24)

The light (8) confirms the USB operation.


The following image exhibits the light (8):

Figure 53 - Light (8)

The device at test start acquires the selection of the type of interface, USB
or ETHERNET; the type of interface cannot be changed unless the test set is
powered OFF.
The ETHERNET cable provided crosses the signals, so that it can be directly
connected to the PC. In case of performing a connection via the INTERNET,
use a straight connection cable.
The following table list the step necessary for the connection to INTERNET:
Set the device IP address: MODE 1
Step Description Scheme
Usually, the DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is
available on the INTERNET line; please, ask confirmation to the
1
Network Manager. In this situation, the line server will look for
the first available IP address: this avoids any danger of conflict

On the test set, click on


2
the toothed wheel icon

After the test set is


connected, on the
Communication icon is
3 displayed the device IP
address; otherwise, the
icon says that there is no
connection

Table 45 - Connection to INTERNET: MODE 1 (1/2)


Set the device IP address: MODE 1
Step Description Scheme

Press the icon and verify


that the listening port is
23; else, modify it. Next,
4 select the “Enable
DHCP” icon, and press
OK: the device is given
the IP address

After OK, return to the


previous page. It is
possible not to have the
address; to read it, wait
about 10 seconds, enter
5
again the
communication window,
and exit it without doing
anything: the address is
there

Table 46 - Connection to INTERNET: MODE 1 (2/2)


Set the device IP address: MODE 2
Step Description Scheme

Using the local


connection cable, or if
the DHCP is not available
on the line, it is possible
1 to set the address
desired, by entering the
Communication window
and selecting Disable
DHCP

Enter the IP address. With a direct connection there is no


problem; if, instead, the INTERNET is used, it is necessary to be
2
sure that the device IP address is not used by other devices on
the net (to this purpose, please refer to the network manager)
Table 47 - Connection to INTERNET: MODE 2

Back to the PC, selecting the ETHERNET connection, the program asks to
specify the device IP address. The following image exhibits the window in
which insert the IP address:

Figure 54 - Insert the IP address


The following table lists the necessary steps in case of any problem with the
INTERNET connection:
Step Description Scheme
Go to the Start
command of WINDOWS,
press Run, type "CMD",
and then type the
1 command "PING
192.168.0.91" (or the set
IP address): the software
looks for the device at
the specified address
If the cable is properly connected and the DRTS XX is listening,
reply message is issued; otherwise, an error message is issued:
2
in this case, turn off and on the instrument keeping the cable
plugged, and repeat the connection
If the PC's INTERNET address is in the same subnet (for
example, 192.168.0.1 is OK), the instrument should be able to
3
create the link. Note that the gateway field is not important for
the communication between PC and DRTS XX

If the PC is able to
connect to DRTS XX, in
4 the IP address window it
is possible to read the IP
address

Table 48 - Steps for problems with the INTERNET connection


The following table lists the necessary steps to select the presence of the
option “Mains Synchronization”, if the generation must be synchronized to
the Mains:

Step Description Scheme

On the test set, click on


1
the toothed wheel icon

Click on the “Software”


2
selection

Table 49 - Steps to select the option “Mains Synchronization” (1/2)


Step Description Scheme

Select “Mains
Synchronization”: the
following message is
displayed.
3 The message reminds
that in this operating
mode it is impossible to
change the frequency
nor to ramp frequency
and phase

Press “OK” in the


message and the “Mains
4
Synchronization” is
selected

Table 50 - Steps to select the option “Mains Synchronization” (2/2)


There is another selection related to the PC connection.
The following table lists the necessary steps for the “Remote Control”
selection:
Step Description Scheme

On the test set, click on


1
the toothed wheel icon

Click on the “Software”


2
selection

Table 51 – Steps for the “Remote Control” selection (1/3)


Step Description Scheme

Select the “Ways of


showing V,I in remote
3 control”, put a tick in
“Values” and then select
“OK”

Next to this selection,


when the test set is
connected to the PC, the
4
display exhibits the
parameters which follow
the generated values

In alternative, it is
possible to select “Ways
of showing V,I in remote
5
control”, put a tick in
“Status” and then press
“OK”

Table 52 - Steps for the “Remote Control” selection (2/3)


Step Description Scheme

Next to this selection,


when the test set is
connected to the PC, the
display exhibits the
“Remote Control” page
6 where the lights turn on
when an input is active.
This selection increases
the speed of
communication

In both modes of visualization, it is possible to disconnect from


7
the PC pressing SHIFT+F3
Table 53 - Steps for the “Remote Control” selection (3/3)

Please, remember that the following selections, performed


locally, remain active after the connection with the PC:
• ETHERNET address
• “Mains Synchronizer” selection
• “Remote Control” page settings
• Auxiliary DC voltage generation (see Chapter 8.2)
• Burden impedance (see Chapter 8.2)
• CB simulation (see Chapter 8.3)
At the end of the test with the PC, to modify the previous
settings, it is necessary to exit and come back to the local
control page
5 TEST EXECUTION/PROBLEM SOLUTIONS
Power-on the PC and then connect it to the powered-on DRTS XX, to which
the relay has already been connected. Before executing an automatic test,
it is a good rule to start the manual program, and to execute some tests to
check that there is no error in the connections and in parameter setting, and
that it is possible to drive the load.
Before test start, the test set checks voltage and current output sockets.

If a voltage greater than 15 V is detected on either output, the


test set and the PC give a message of counter-feed on the
voltage or current output: this avoids connecting test set’s
outputs to a live wire. In this instance, remove the voltage
before proceeding
On the auxiliary DC voltage supply, a voltage of 20 V is
immediately sensed and alerted locally: remove the wrong
connection

The following table compares the behavior of V and I outputs and V DC:
Situation V and I outputs V DC
Open relay
At power-on No relay
(protected)
At test start, even if
Counter-feed alarm Immediate
V=0 and I=0
Closed relay
During tests Closed relay
(electronic
(STOP not pressed) (electronic protection)
protection)
Open relay
After RESET No relay
(protected)
Closed relay
After STOP No relay
(electronic protection)
Table 54 - Comparison between V and I outputs and V DC
The test set can be controlled locally: in this situation, output voltages and
currents are continuously displayed. With PC connection, the display
confirms the connection. The following image exhibits the display
confirmation:

Figure 55 - Display confirmation

After a test is started, as soon as the DRTS XX generates some output, the
ON and RUN icons turn on.
The following image exhibits the ON and RUN icons:

Figure 56 - ON and RUN icons

After the relay trip, if some pre-fault parameter is not zero, the ON icon will
stay on. If, during the test, a fault is detected, the Fault light turns to red:
the faulty component is displayed on the screen.
The following image exhibits the Fault light:

Figure 57 - Fault light

As the test is performed, it is possible to read on the display the output


values.
The display follows the outputs; so, during pauses between tests, healthy
parameters are displayed.
If the buzzer beeps during the test, it alerts about an error. Most commonly,
one of the following problems:
• Error on a voltage output, usually an overload (including the short
circuit).
• Error on a current output, usually an overload (including the open
circuit).
• Over-temperature sensed on a voltage or current amplifier
The display and PC give a message that helps understanding the type of
fault.
Usually, it is sufficient to correct the load and start over again. In case of
over-temperature, go to zero with the outputs and start over again after
some minute. Other faults have an internal origin: try again, and, if it does
not disappear, it is necessary to repair the instrument. The troubleshooting
manual lists error messages, and the corresponding corrective action.
Other logic errors can be shown on the display. The error message explains
which kind of error has been sensed. If the error is in the connection area,
check the connection cable.
When everything is OK, it is possible to proceed with the execution of the
test program. The program Help will tell the operator how to connect the
relay.
The way to use TDMS and the dedicated programs is explained in the
corresponding manuals. In general, it is a good rule to save test results at
the end of the test, so that they can be reloaded and printed.
6 POWER-OFF
After all tests have been performed, press the RESET button, power-off the
test set, pressing the ON/OFF button (17) for some seconds, and remove all
relay connections.
The following image exhibits the button (17):

Figure 58 - Button (17)

Do not power-off with outputs being generated, and with the


relay connected: high voltage spikes could be generated; the
test set could be faulty at next power-on

Do not disconnect the relay and connect another one before


pressing the RESET push-button: with this action, V and I
outputs are isolated, and there is no danger consequent to the
erroneous connection to a live wire
Page left intentionally blank.
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1 - FRONT PANEL .................................................................................. 37
FIGURE 2 - REAR PANEL .................................................................................... 38
FIGURE 3 – REAR PANEL: PLUG (19).................................................................... 39
FIGURE 4 – REAR PANEL: GROUND SOCKET (22) .................................................... 39
FIGURE 5 - FRONT PANEL: PUSH-BUTTON (17), LIGHTS (16), LIGHT (18).................... 40
FIGURE 6 - FRONT PANEL: SOCKETS (14) AND (13) ................................................ 41
FIGURE 7 - FRONT PANEL: SOCKETS (12) .............................................................. 42
FIGURE 8 - FRONT PANEL: TRIP INPUTS (7) ........................................................... 43
FIGURE 9 - FRONT PANEL: OUTPUTS (4) ............................................................... 44
FIGURE 10 – REAR PANEL: CONNECTOR (26) ........................................................ 45
FIGURE 11 - FRONT PANEL: SOCKETS (6) AND FUSES (5).......................................... 46
FIGURE 12 – REAR PANEL: CONNECTOR (26) ........................................................ 49
FIGURE 13 - TEST SET WITH LIFTED FEET ............................................................... 50
FIGURE 14 - TEST SET SUPPORT: CLOSED AND OPENED ............................................ 50
FIGURE 15 - USE OF THE TEST SET SUPPORT .......................................................... 51
FIGURE 16 - FRONT PANEL: SAFETY SOCKETS (14) .................................................. 56
FIGURE 17 - MAIN CONTROL SCREEN .................................................................. 58
FIGURE 18 - AUXILIARY VOLTAGE/BURDEN SETTINGS ............................................. 58
FIGURE 19 - MODE 6I ...................................................................................... 59
FIGURE 20 - TWO OUTPUTS IN PARALLEL .............................................................. 61
FIGURE 21 – PARALLEL CONNECTION................................................................... 63
FIGURE 22 - SERIES CONNECTION ....................................................................... 65
FIGURE 23 – 2P S 2P CONNECTION .................................................................... 66
FIGURE 24 - DC GENERATION CONNECTION .......................................................... 68
FIGURE 25 - IN2-CDG DEVICE ........................................................................... 69
FIGURE 26 – DRTS XX AND RELAY CONNECTION VIA IN2-CDG OPTION .................... 71
FIGURE 27 - LINEAR CHARACTERISTICS OF THE DRTS XX POWER CURVE ..................... 73
FIGURE 28 - HPB 400 OPTION .......................................................................... 74
FIGURE 29 – LINEAR CHAR. OF DRTS XX + HPB 400 OPTION POWER CURVE ............. 75
FIGURE 30 - HPB 600 OPTION .......................................................................... 75
FIGURE 31 - LINEAR CHAR. OF DRTS XX + HPB 600 OPTION POWER CURVE .............. 76
FIGURE 32 - HPB 400 OPTION CONNECTION ........................................................ 78
FIGURE 33 - HPB 600 OPTION CONNECTION ........................................................ 78
FIGURE 34 - HPB 400 OPTIONS: SERIES CONNECTION ............................................ 80
FIGURE 35 - HPB OPTION: PARALLEL CONNECTION ................................................ 81
FIGURE 36 - DELTA CONNECTION OF CURRENT OUTPUTS ......................................... 85
FIGURE 37 - THREE OUTPUT CURRENTS ................................................................ 85
FIGURE 38 - FRONT PANEL: SAFETY SOCKETS (13) .................................................. 86
FIGURE 39 - FRONT PANEL: AUXILIARY DC SUPPLY VOLTAGE (12) ............................. 87
FIGURE 40 – VOLTAGE OUTPUTS: SERIES CONNECTION............................................ 88
FIGURE 41 - VOLTAGE OUTPUTS: PARALLEL CONNECTION ........................................ 89
FIGURE 42 - AC CURRENT ................................................................................. 90
FIGURE 43 - FRONT PANEL: SAFETY SOCKETS (12) .................................................. 93
FIGURE 44 - FRONT PANEL: TRIP INPUTS (7) ......................................................... 95
FIGURE 45 - REASON FOR A VOLTAGE THRESHOLD .................................................. 96
FIGURE 46 - ENERGY METER UNDER TEST WITH THE DRTSXX AS THE REFERENCE ......... 98
FIGURE 47 – ENERGY METER UNDER TEST WITH AN ENERGY METER AS THE REFERENCE .. 99
FIGURE 48 - SHA 2003 OPTION POSITION ......................................................... 100
FIGURE 49 - SOCKETS (4) AND 32-WAY CONNECTOR (26) ..................................... 102
FIGURE 50 - 32-WAY CONNECTOR (26) ............................................................. 104
FIGURE 51 - MEASUREMENT INPUTS (6) AND FUSES (5)........................................ 105
FIGURE 52 - USB CONNECTOR (10) AND ETHERNET CONNECTOR (24) ................. 106
FIGURE 53 - LIGHT (8).................................................................................... 106
FIGURE 54 - INSERT THE IP ADDRESS ................................................................. 109
FIGURE 55 - DISPLAY CONFIRMATION ................................................................ 117
FIGURE 56 - ON AND RUN ICONS .................................................................... 117
FIGURE 57 - FAULT LIGHT ................................................................................ 118
FIGURE 58 - BUTTON (17) .............................................................................. 119
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE 1 - FRONT PANEL COMPONENTS ................................................................ 37
TABLE 2 - REAR PANEL COMPONENTS ................................................................... 38
TABLE 3 - REAR PANEL SYMBOLS ......................................................................... 38
TABLE 4 - TRIP INPUTS (7) (1/2) ........................................................................ 43
TABLE 5 - TRIP INPUTS (7) (2/2) ........................................................................ 44
TABLE 6 - TEST SET INTERFACE CONNECTORS ......................................................... 47
TABLE 7 - LOCAL OPERATION ELEMENTS ............................................................... 48
TABLE 8 - SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHARACTERISTICS ....................................................... 52
TABLE 9 - STEPS FOR POWER-ON THE TEST SET (1/3) .............................................. 52
TABLE 10 - STEPS FOR POWER-ON THE TEST SET (2/3) ............................................ 53
TABLE 11 - STEPS FOR POWER-ON THE TEST SET (3/3) ............................................ 54
TABLE 12 - EFFECTS OF TOO HIGH BURDEN ........................................................... 57
TABLE 13 - SUPPLY CHARACTERISTIC OF THE DRTS XX ............................................ 59
TABLE 14 – 6I TDMS SETTINGS ......................................................................... 60
TABLE 15 – 6I MAX POWER AND MAX BURDEN ..................................................... 60
TABLE 16 – 2P MAX POWER AND MAX BURDEN .................................................... 62
TABLE 17 – 2P TDMS SETTINGS ........................................................................ 63
TABLE 18 – PARALLEL MAX POWER AND MAX BURDEN ............................................ 64
TABLE 19 – SERIES MAX POWER AND MAX BURDEN ................................................ 65
TABLE 20 – SERIES TDMS SETTINGS ................................................................... 66
TABLE 21 - 2P S 2P MAX POWER AND MAX BURDEN.............................................. 67
TABLE 22 – 2P S 2P TDMS SETTINGS ................................................................. 67
TABLE 23 – ONE OR MORE DC CURRENT OUTPUT: MAX POWER AND MAX BURDEN ...... 68
TABLE 24 – ALL IN PARALLEL WITH DC CURRENT: MAX POWER AND MAX BURDEN ........ 68
TABLE 25 - IN2-CDG OPTION CHARACTERISTICS ................................................... 70
TABLE 26 - IOUT VS VMAX AND LOADMAX .................................................................. 70
TABLE 27 - LINEAR CHARACTERISTICS DATA ........................................................... 73
TABLE 28 - HPB 400 OPTION CHARACTERISTICS .................................................... 74
TABLE 29 - HPB 600 OPTION CHARACTERISTICS .................................................... 76
TABLE 30 - DRTS XX AND THE HPB OPTIONS (1/2) .............................................. 77
TABLE 31 - DRTS XX AND THE HPB OPTIONS (2/2) .............................................. 77
TABLE 32 – IMPEDANCE RELATED TO THE USE OF HPB 400 AND 600 OPTIONS ........... 77
TABLE 33 - STEPS BEFORE TO START A TEST WITH THE HPB 600 OPTION .................... 79
TABLE 34 - CHARACTERISTICS OF THE HPB 400 OPTION IN SERIES............................. 80
TABLE 35 - CHARACTERISTICS OF THE HPB 400 OPTION IN PARALLEL ........................ 81
TABLE 36 - MANUAL CONTROL PROCEDURE ......................................................... 82
TABLE 37 - DISTANCE ANSI 21 PROCEDURE ......................................................... 83
TABLE 38 - OVERCURRENT ANSI 50-51 68 AND DIFFERENTIAL 87 PROCEDURE .......... 84
TABLE 39 – VOLTAGE OUTPUTS: MAX POWER AND MAX BURDEN .............................. 88
TABLE 40 - INSTANCE BURDENS .......................................................................... 89
TABLE 41 – PROCEDURE FOR SLOWING INCREASE THE VOLTAGE SUPPLY ..................... 91
TABLE 42 - MAXIMUM LOADS FOR THE MOST USED VOLTAGES ................................. 94
TABLE 43 - NOMINAL VOLTAGE AND THRESHOLD ................................................... 96
TABLE 44 - MEASUREMENT INPUTS CHARACTERISTICS........................................... 105
TABLE 45 - CONNECTION TO INTERNET: MODE 1 (1/2).................................... 107
TABLE 46 - CONNECTION TO INTERNET: MODE 1 (2/2).................................... 108
TABLE 47 - CONNECTION TO INTERNET: MODE 2 ............................................ 109
TABLE 48 - STEPS FOR PROBLEMS WITH THE INTERNET CONNECTION..................... 110
TABLE 49 - STEPS TO SELECT THE OPTION “MAINS SYNCHRONIZATION” (1/2) ........... 111
TABLE 50 - STEPS TO SELECT THE OPTION “MAINS SYNCHRONIZATION” (2/2) ........... 112
TABLE 51 – STEPS FOR THE “REMOTE CONTROL” SELECTION (1/3) ......................... 113
TABLE 52 - STEPS FOR THE “REMOTE CONTROL” SELECTION (2/3).......................... 114
TABLE 53 - STEPS FOR THE “REMOTE CONTROL” SELECTION (3/3).......................... 115
TABLE 54 - COMPARISON BETWEEN V AND I OUTPUTS AND V DC ........................... 116
DRTS XX FAMILY
CHAPTER 3 - OPTIONS
Chapter 3
OPTIONS

DOCUMENT No. MIE10170, Rev. 1.33, March 2015


TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 3 - OPTIONS........................................................................... 125
1 AMPLIFIER AMI 332 AND AMI 632 OPTIONS ................................. 129
1.1 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................. 129
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF AMI 332 AND AMI 632 ......................................... 130
1.3 CONNECTION AND TEST START .......................................................... 131
1.3.1 Power-on ........................................................................... 131
1.3.2 Connection to the relay under test.................................... 132
1.3.2.1 Use of AMI to have more currents.......................................... 133
1.3.2.2 Six currents rated 64 A ............................................................ 133
1.3.2.3 Three currents rated 128 A ..................................................... 133
1.3.2.4 Single phase tests at 256 A ..................................................... 134

2 END TO END TEST SETS SYNCHRONIZATION .................................. 135


2.1 INTERNAL GPS OPTION ................................................................... 137
2.2 INTERNAL IRIG-B OPTION ............................................................... 138
2.3 EXTERNAL GPS OPTION................................................................... 139
2.3.1 The GPS option function.................................................... 139
2.3.2 Directions for the use of GPS option ................................. 139
2.3.3 Test setup .......................................................................... 141
3 LINE SYNCHRONIZATION OPTION ................................................. 143
4 IEC61850-8 OPTION....................................................................... 145
4.1 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................. 145
4.1.1 Trip delay test with GOOSE ............................................... 146
4.1.2 GOOSE publishing ............................................................. 147
4.1.3 GOOSE subscribing ............................................................ 148
4.2 IEC 61850-8 INTERFACE ................................................................ 149
4.2.1 File ..................................................................................... 151
4.2.2 Exploring Goose, Virtual Contacts, Goose Publishing ....... 152
4.2.3 Exploring Options & Log Activity ....................................... 153
4.2.3.1 Explore at START ..................................................................... 154
4.2.3.2 Explore Now ............................................................................ 155
4.2.3.3 Use Virtual Contacts to STOP the test..................................... 156
4.2.4 Goose List & Goose Details ............................................... 157
4.2.5 Filters ................................................................................ 159
4.2.6 Substation File ................................................................... 163
4.2.7 Virtual Contacts ................................................................ 169
4.2.8 Publishing .......................................................................... 174
4.2.9 Subscribing ........................................................................ 183
5 IEC61850-9 OPTION....................................................................... 188
6 DRTS9 OPTION .............................................................................. 195
1 AMPLIFIER AMI 332 AND AMI 632 OPTIONS
1.1 Introduction
The optional amplifiers AMI 332 and AMI 632 have the purpose to allow
controlling nine or twelve currents at the meantime.
With AMI 632 it is possible to generate six currents rated 64 A by connecting
in parallel the outputs of DRTS XX and of the optional amplifier.
With AMI632 it is possible to have three currents at 128 A, or one current at
256 A.
1.2 Description of AMI 332 and AMI 632
The optional amplifiers include:
• Three current generators (AMI 332) or six current generators
(AMI 632)
• The power supply
• The control boards that supervise the unit
Physically, AMI 332 and AMI 632 are housed in a container that is the same
as DRTS XX, 3 U high, with handle for ease of transportation.
Amplifiers are the same as those used in DRTS XX.
In the front panel, there are the followings:
• The current output sockets
• The power-on push-button
In the rear panel, there are the followings:
• The connector to DRTS XX
• The power supply socket
The following image exhibits the front panel of the AMI 632:

Figure 1 - AMI 632: front panel


1.3 Connection and test start
1.3.1 Power-
Power-on
The following table lists the necessary steps for the connection of DRTS XX
to AMI 332/632:

Step Description
Before connecting the relay, connect AMI 332 or AMI 632 to
DRTS XX, with the cable provided:

Connect also the current neutral IN socket of DRTS XX to the IN


socket of AMI with the cable provided. Then connect DRTS XX
2
and AMI to the mains, by means of the power supply cords. The
earth is connected to the supply plug
Power-on AMI first, then DRTS XX. At power-on the self-
diagnostic is executed; the display shows the booster in the list
of peripherals

Table 1 - Steps for the connection of DRTS XX to AMI 332/632 (1/2)


Step Description
When there is no problem, all components are green checked,
including the booster:

If something is wrong, the booster is grey checked:

Table 2 - Steps for the connection of DRTS XX to AMI 332/632 (2/2)

1.3.2 Connection to the relay under test


Before executing the test with AMI, check that the burdens of the relay
under test are compatible with the maximum load. Consider that the power
of AMI outputs is the same as DRTS XX.
The connection of DRTS XX and AMI to the relay under test depends upon
the choice about the AMI function.
Aside currents, all other signals (voltages, trip input, and auxiliary outputs),
shall be connected to DRTS XX.
1.3.2.1 Use of AMI to have more currents
In this instance, currents I1÷I6 is connected to DRTS XX, and:
• Currents I7÷I9 to AMI 332
• Currents I7÷I12 to AMI 632
All DRTS XX voltage outputs are available: in all, 9 or 12 currents and 6
voltages at the meanwhile. Current ranges and outputs of the two units are
independently set.

1.3.2.2 Six currents rated 64 A


With AMI 632, it is possible to perform a six phase test at 64 A.
To this purpose, connect in parallel current outputs of DRTS XX and of AMI
632: the maximum burden is 0.2 Ohm for all outputs.
The following image exhibits the connection (the order exhibited is in order
to minimize the heat dissipation):

Figure 2 - DRTS XX, AMI 632 and relay connection

1.3.2.3 Three currents rated 128 A


If it is necessary to perform a three phase test at 128 A, connect in parallel
current outputs of DRTS XX to those of AMI 632.
Maximum power is 500 VA at 80 A; burden is 0.08 Ohm for all outputs.
Outputs are phase shifted of 120°.
The following image exhibits the connection:

Figure 3 - DRTS XX, AMI 632 and relay connection

1.3.2.4 Single phase tests at 256 A


Select 0° between currents, both on DRTS XX and AMI 632.
Connect all outputs together and to one end of the load; connect IN (DRTS
XX) to IN (AMI 632), and to the other end of the load.
The corresponding maximum power is 2000 VA at 128 A; maximum load is
120 mΩ at 128 A.
The following image exhibits the connection:

Figure 4 - DRTS XX, AMI 632 and relay connection

Consider that the final section of the connection wires should be 50 mm2 (it
is a high current connection).
2 END TO END TEST SETS SYNCHRONIZATION
Purpose of this feature is to allow synchronizing two distant test sets so that
they simulate a fault exactly at the same time. This feature is mandatory in
the following cases:
• Distance relays connected with schemes such as permissive or
blocking over-reach
• Line differential relays
In the first instance, the timing error can be in the range of some millisecond;
for the second one, the maximum timing error is 100 μs: a bigger error
implies a phase angle error, which causes a not acceptable current
differential error.
The following image exhibits the previous situation:

Figure 5 – Synchronization of two-distance relay


Relays 1 and 2 are distant; their operation relies upon the connection
between them, which is logic signals for distance relays, and analog signal
on pilot wire or logic signal on optical fiber for line differential relays.
To perform the test we need two operators, with one test set and a PC each,
which are speak each other by phone; both have connected the test set to
their relay, started the Manual program, and both have selected the one of
the following synchronization options:
• Internal GPS
• Internal IRIG-B
• External GPS
• Line synchronization
2.1 Internal GPS option
The internal GPS option is a card to be inserted inside the DRTS XX and it is
possible to request for it at the order, or successively.
The option comes with the IRIG-B synchronization module. The IEC61850-9
option and the internal GPS option can coexist on the same test set.
The option includes the antenna and the 20 m long connection cable; the
antenna connector is located on the rear of the test set.
The following image exhibits the GPS antenna:

Figure 6 - GPS antenna

With the internal GPS option, it is necessary to connect the antenna first and
then to power-on the DRTS XX, else the software does not recognize it.
Detailed explanations about how to use this option can be found in the
following documents:
• Manual Control (software)
• Distance 21 manual (software)
• Differential 87 manual (software)
• Comtrade manual (software)
2.2 Internal IRIG-
IRIG-B option
IRIG-B is a system widely used in substation for the synchronization of all
devices of interest; if it is available, it is better to use it, as there is no need
to locate the antenna. If IRIG-B is not available, the best alternative is to use
the internal GPS synchronization: you need the antenna, but then the
software takes care of GPS.
The internal IRIG-B option is a card to be inserted inside the DRTS XX and it
is possible to request for it at the order, or successively.
The following image exhibits the IRIG-B connector on the rear panel:

Figure 7 - IRIG-B connector

An optical cable performs the connection.


Detailed explanations about how to use this option are placed in the
following documents:
• Manual Control (software)
• Distance 21 manual (software)
• Differential 87 manual (software)
• Comtrade manual (software)
2.3 External GPS option
2.3.1 The GPS option function
The GPS option can generate the synchronization impulses.
They last 10 ms and have a maximum error of 2 μs between two GPS.
These impulses can be generated as the seconds of the absolute time are
elapsed, with a pace selectable among 5, 10, 20, 30, 40 or 60 s. The first
impulse is generated after one to two complete periods are elapsed from
the moment the START/STOP pushbutton was pressed.

2.3.2 Directions for the use of GPS option


The following image exhibits the front panel of the GPS synchronizer:

Figure 8 – External GPS option: front panel

The following table lists the components of the front panel:


ITEM Component
1 START/STOP pushbutton, with light

2 Pulse interval selector

3 Pulse available

4 1 pps light; GPS ON

5 GPS locked
Table 3 - Components of the front panel
The following image exhibits the rear panel of the GPS synchronizer:

Figure 9 - External GPS option: rear panel

The following table lists the components of the rear panel:

ITEM Component

6 Mains connector

7 BNC connector to antenna

8 Pulse output sockets


Table 4 - Components of the rear panel

The operators at both sites should connect first GPS to the mains by the plug
(6): the 1 pps light starts turning on, thus assuring that GPS is operational.
Locate the antenna that should be set in a place that allows it to see the sky
at an angle of 160° all around. Usually it is enough to put it on the roof of
the protections building. The antenna should reach a height lower than the
lightning arrester; else, in case of lightning, there would be a danger for the
operator and the device.
The antenna provided has a cable 6 m long, and the extension cable is 20 m
long: enough for the testing purpose. The user can increase the distance by
a further extension cable, provided that it is made of satellite graded
shielded cable, such as CT/100 or CT/167, with BNC connectors.
The maximum cable length should be such not to attenuate more than 10
dB the signal at 1.5 GHz: for CT/100 this means 30 m maximum. However,
in this situation the antenna must have a completely free view.
After the antenna is located, connect it to GPS with connector (7). The green
GPS locked light (5) turns on within 15 minutes (typically 1 minute); if not,
the cable is too long or the antenna view is limited by some shielding
building.
In each substation, connect the DRTS XX to the relay to be tested.
The following image exhibits the connection:

Figure 10 - Connection between DRTS XX and relay

2.3.3 Test setup


Connect now GPS to DRTS XX. To this purpose, connect the black socket (8)
to C (5-6) common, and the red socket (8) to C5. Connect DRTS XX to the PC
and select in Preferences DC Voltage, 24 V for C5. Select also De-bounce
delay = 0 for C5.
Select the pulse interval on switch (2): 30 s or more are a good choice, to
have enough time between the tests START command on the PC and the
arrival of the synchronization impulse. Operators should program the same
time interval on the two GPS. After this, they should press the GPS
START/STOP button (1): its light turns on, and the PULSE light (3) turns on as
the first synchronization impulse is generated; it is applied after one to two
selected periods. After this, impulses are generated at the selected time
interval.
It is possible now to start the test. The two operators should start the test
program they want to use. Let us assume for example that the program is
TDMS DISTANCE 21, with the INTERTRIP test selected.
Both operators should program the desired fault impedances before starting
the first test; then, they should wait for the PULSE light (3) to turn on, and
then press test START on the PC.
When the two DRTS XX detect the first synchronization pulse, they execute
the first test at the meantime, and provide the first test result. After the new
impedance values have been programmed, pressing test START on PC the
same way, i.e. after the PULSE light (3) has turned on, the second test can
be initiated, and so on until all tests are over.
Detailed explanations about how to use this option are placed in the
following documents:
• Manual Control (software)
• Distance 21 manual (software)
• Differential 87 manual (software)
• Comtrade manual (software)
3 LINE SYNCHRONIZATION OPTION
The option is made of a mains supply plug that fits into the mains socket,
and which has an optical fiber for the connection to the test set IRIG-B input.
The purpose is to synchronize the outputs of two test sets to the mains: as
the synchronization is repeated every cycle, the test set stays locked to the
mains for the infinity.
The following image exhibits the option and the optical fiber:

Figure 11 - Option and optical fiber

There are two instances where the option can be necessary:


• Generating a current or voltage into a device that is also taking a
signal from the mains
• Synchronizing two test sets to the mains, and then using them to
test line differential relays, in places where the GPS option cannot
be used
The following image exhibits to a test of line differential relays:

Figure 12 - Test of line differential relays


The optical fiber of the mains synchronizer has to be connected to the IRIG-
B connector of both test sets.
Before starting the test program, it is necessary to enable the option (“Mains
Synchronization”), as explained in Chapter 2.4.
Start the program that allows performing the differential test with Mains
synchronization: both test sets are locked to the mains. It is possible to apply
the nominal current to both ends: as if this is not performed at the
meantime, the relay trips until both inputs are sensed: just ignore the
corresponding trip. This is the pre-fault situation.
From this moment on, it is possible to perform any test, of the type
healthy/fault/healthy: it will be possible to explore the entire relay curve. If,
when both currents are applied, the relay is still in the trip condition, this is
because currents are 180° shifted: just turn one of the two options.
The option operates with all TDMS programs, unless “Sequencer” and
“Comtrade”.
4 IEC61850-
IEC61850-8 OPTION
4.1 Introduction
In the Appendix XI, there are the related TUEV SUED certificates.
The IEC61850-8 optional module allows DRTS XX to expand their testing
capabilities by handling 64 IEC61850-8 messages.
The option is a board installed inside DRTS XX. The following software,
included in the TDMS suite, operate the feature:
• Manual Control
• Sequencer
• Distance 21
• Synchrocheck 25
• Overcurrent
• Differential
The IEC61850 Standard defines the interconnection of Intelligent Electronic
Devices in a Substation. The part 8 of the standard defines how an IED
transfers logic messages. One such message coming from an IED (such a
relay), is called GOOSE.
In the older substations, devices are connected among them and to the
supervisor by means of many copper wire cables. Setting a substation meant
drawing very many connection schematics, which are prone to errors, and
hard to modify. Once drawn, schematics are used to perform the wiring, and
to check connections during the commissioning.
With IEC 61850-8, drawings are replaced by a Substation file, which collects
all information related to the various IED, and all GOOSE messages, which
are exchanged between IED, without, forgot no information.
In such a substation, new needs arise, as follows:
• The test of an IEC61850-8 interfaced relay changes: instead of the
trip (copper wire) contact, the test set must be able to read the
GOOSEs, to locate find the one containing the trip information, and
to read GOOSEs in real time, to measure the trip delay
• The test of the substation cabling disappears: instead, it is
necessary to verify the correctness of messages, and of the
response of IED to GOOSEs addressed to them

ATTENTION: The DRTS6 test set performs only the first of the
above tests, while all DRTS XX test sets perform both of them

4.1.1 Trip delay test with GOOSE


Purpose of the test is to verify the correctness and timing of GOOSEs sent
by the relay on the station bus.
First, DRTS XX current and voltage outputs must be connected to the relay
under test. The following image exhibits the connections between DRTS XX
and a relay (ABB REL670):

Figure 13 - Connections between DRTS XX and a relay (ABB REL670)


If available, also copper wire relay trip outputs can be connected, so that it
is possible to verify that the measured GOOSE delay matches with the trip
delay.
Next, the instrument is connected to the substation bus, or to the relay
alone. To this purpose, the instrument is provided with an ETHERNET-like
connector on its front, marked IEC 61850-8. The connection to the Station
bus can be performed in two ways, as follows:
• Connection with a switch/hub: connect the instrument to the
switch with the direct cable provided
• Direct connection: connect the instrument directly to the IED with
the cross cable provided
The following sequence lists the necessary steps to execute the IED tests:
• Monitor all messages that the relay sends to the network
• Select the GOOSE and the virtual contact for the trip command
measure
• Sett the trip value on the virtual contact
• Start a test and verify the GOOSE message delay

4.1.2 GOOSE publishing


In this functioning mode, the test set is able to simulate one or more IED of
a substation network. For this reason the test set is connected to the
substation bus, with a switch/hub device, using the cross cable provided

ATTENTION: DRTS XX current and voltage outputs are not


used
The following sequence lists the necessary steps to simulate an IED:
• Import an SCL file format (Substation Configuration Language)
• Select one or more IED: relay, CB, etc.
• After this selection, decide what GOOSE publish. It is possible to
publish until 64 GOOSE
• Check that the GOOSE messages are published in a free mode or
superimposed to a test

4.1.3 GOOSE subscribing


In this functioning mode, the test set is able to verify if a published GOOSE
from one IED respects the semantic and the synchronism rules of the IEC
61850-8 standard.
The connection to the Station bus can be performed in two ways, as follows:
• Connection with a switch/hub: connect the instrument to the
switch with the direct cable provided
• Direct connection: connect the instrument directly to the IED with
the cross cable provided
The following sequence lists the necessary steps for the GOOSE subscribing:
• Import an SCL file format (Substation Configuration Language)
• Select one or more IED: relay, CB, etc.
• After this selection, decide what GOOSE subscribe. It is
recommended to subscribe at the same time a limited number of
messages, to avoid the excessive proliferation of monitoring
subscribing files
• Start a GOOSE exploring session: the subscribing mode is enabled
4.2 IEC 61850-
61850-8 interface
To start the connection, press the “IEC61580” icon. The following image
exhibits this icon:

Figure 14 - "IEC61580" icon

The following image exhibits the “Goose Explorer” page, when the test set
is not connected:

Figure 15 - "Goose Explorer" page (test set not connected)


The following image exhibits the “Goose Explorer” page, when the test set
is connected:

Figure 16 - "Goose Explorer" page (test set connected)

The following table lists the available selections on the “Goose Explorer”
page:

Item Description Display


File
1
(Chapter 4.2.1)
Exploring Goose, Virtual
2 Contacts, Goose Publishing
(Chapter 4.2.2)

Exploring Options
3 Log Activity
(Chapter 4.2.3)

Table 5 - Selections on the “Goose Explorer” page (1/2)


Item Description Display

Goose List & Goose Details


4
(Chapter 4.2.4)

Filters
5
(Chapter 4.2.5)

Table 6 - Selections on the “Goose Explorer” page (2/2)

4.2.1 File
A drop-down menu is provided to manage the data of the “Goose Explorer”
page.
The following image exhibits the File drop-down menu:

Figure 17 - File drop-down menu


The following table lists the selections in the File drop-down menu:

Selection Description
The program opens a database file (.Gse), containing
the result of a session of exploring of the IEC61850-8
Open Exploring File
network. It also loads the filters, virtual contacts and
publishers that have been previously saved in the file
It saves a database file (.Gse), containing the result of
a session of exploring of the IEC61850-8 network.
Save Exploring File
The file contains also any info on filters, virtual
contacts or publishers that have been set up
It opens a substation setting file (.Scd, .Icd, .Xml),
containing the configuration of the substation,
Open Substation File
including the GOOSEs available for each IED on the
network
Table 7 - Selections in the File drop-down menu

4.2.2 Exploring Goose, Virtual


Virtual Contacts, Goose Publishing
The following table list the available tabs:
Tab Description
Home page of the program; iti is possible to
Exploring Goose
monitor the GOOSEs in the network
Substation File
This page shows the GOOSE list of the Substation
(it appears only after a
file
substation file upload)
This page displays and sets the Virtual Contacts
Virtual Contacts that are selected from the explored GOOSEs
and/or that are importted from the substation file
Goose Publishing
This page displays the list of published GOOSEs
(it appears only after the
and it allows to modify the values of the GOOOSEs
publishing of almost one
body
GOOSE)
Goose Subscribing
This page displays the list of subscribing GOOSEs
(it appears only after the
and it displays the Log Activity of the monitored
subscribing of almost one
events in the substation
GOOSE)
Table 8 - Available tabs
4.2.3 Exploring Options & Log Activity
The first action to perform in order to use effectively the GOOSE Explorer is
to catch the messages on the network.
The following image exhibits the “Explorer Options” area:

Figure 18 - “Explorer Options” area

The following table lists the selections of the “Explorer Options” area:

Selection Display

Explore at START

Explore Now

Use Virtual
Contacts to STOP
the test

This selection disables the IEC61850-8 option, so


Do Not Explore that from now on, it does not monitor the LAN for
GOOSEs
Table 9 - Selections of the “Explorer Options” area
It is possible to reset the GOOSE queue with the relative button. This clears
the IEC61850-8 board from any previous GOOSE still pending.

4.2.3.1 Explore at START


When the “Explore at Start” option is selected, the Exploring is automatically
performed during the execution of a Shot type test. This means that, at the
execution of the Shot, the software acts as follows:
• It opens an exploring session, just prior to the test start
• It executes the shot test until the relay trips as normal
• It closes the exploring session
• It gets the IEC61850-8 messages that have been generated and
it displays them in the “Exploring Goose” page: the header of
the captured GOOSE is displayed in the “Goose List” and the
body of the GOOSE is displayed in the “Goose Details”. The
following image exhibits the “Goose List”:

Figure 19 – “Goose List”, “Explore at Start” selected

• It displays the results of the Shot in the Home page


• It can occur that, as the relay trips, the following message is
displayed:

Figure 20 – Download message


Answer “Yes”, else some messages would be lost
• Optionally, if the “Show Log of Activity” option is selected, it is
possible to see the board activities

4.2.3.2 Explore Now


When the “Explore now” option is selected, it is possible to execute the
exploring by pressing the “Start Exploring” button. Choose appropriately the
“Exploring Time” by setting the relative box. The following image exhibits
the “Start Exploring” button:

Figure 21 - “Start Exploring” button

Pressing the button, the IEC61850-8 board starts to capture the messages,
visible in the “Goose List”.
The following image exhibits the “Goose List” frame:

Figure 22 - “Explore now” selected: “Goose List” frame

The “Start Exploring” button turns red and its caption is changed into “Stop
Exploring”.
The following image exhibits the change of the “Start Exploring” button:

Figure 23 - Change of the “Start Exploring” button

The exploring can be stopped at any moment by pressing the button.


Optionally, it is possible to view the operations executed by the board
putting a flag in the box “Show Log of Activity”.
The following image exhibits the “Log Activity” area:

Figure 24 - “Log Activity” area

4.2.3.3 Use Virtual Contacts to STOP the test


Using this option, to measure the trip delay after the selection of the virtual
contacts is possible.
Please, refer to the Paragraph 4.3.
4.2.4 Goose List & Goose Details
The following image exhibits the “Goose List” and the elements displayed:

Figure 25 - “Goose List” and elements displayed

The following table lists the “Goose List” elements:

Element Description
Src Mac Address Physical address of the generator of the message
Dest Mac Address Physical address of the destination of the message
Control Block
Identifier of the type of message created by the IED
Reference
Goose ID Univocal identifier of the message
Dataset name It is the name of the GOOSE message
Event Timestamp Universal Time that identifies the Goose
(status number) It is a progressive number of the GOOSE status;
stNum it increases only when an event that changes the GOOSE status
appens. The minimum is 1
(sequence number) It is a progressive number of the message,
with the same status. The value increases costantly for each
sqNum message with the same GOOSE ID. The minimum is 1 when the
stNum is incremented; 0 when there is a roll-over (when the the
max number is reached, and the max is 232-1 = 4,294,967,295)
Table 10 - “Goose List” elements
The list of the captured gooses can be ordered in various ways, according to
the “Order Goose List by” drop-down menu.
The following image exhibits the “Order Goose List by” drop-down menu:

Figure 26 - “Order Goose List by” drop-down menu

It is possible to select this menu at any time, even during the receipt of
GOOSEs. It is possible to order data according to the following:
• Number: it orders using the capturing sequence of the GOOSE
messages
• Timestamp: it orders using the UTC (Coordinated Universal Time),
identifier of the GOOSE
• Goose ID: this it orders using the univocal code (GOOSE ID)
• Src Mac Address: it orders using the Mac Address of the generator
of GOOSE messages
Click on a row on the “Goose List”: it is possible to read the details of the
data structure. The following image exhibits the “Goose Details” area:

Figure 27 - “Goose Details” area


4.2.5 Filters
The amount of messages that can travel on an IEC61850-8 network can be
burdening due to the amount of objects connected to it. In order to select a
portion of the messages, it is possible to use Filters.
After having performed a first exploration, before issuing other Explore
commands, decide which messages should be monitored and set the filters:
the program displays only those, which match the selection. In particular, by
selecting one message from the “Goose List” and by right clicking with the
mouse, a drop-down menu is opened.
The following image exhibits the “Goose List” drop-down menu:

Figure 28 - “Goose List” drop-down menu

It is possible to select one of the following element:


• Add filter as IED: the program extracts the IED of the selected
GOOSE and uses it as a Filter, in order to capture only the messages
with that same dataset reference. A name can be given to the filter
by selecting the “Name” column and writing the appropriate name.
The following image exhibits the “Filters” area:

Figure 29 - “Filters” area


Click on the “En” column in order to enable the Filter: the selection
is confirmed by a red check. The following image exhibits the tick in
the “En” column:

Figure 30 - Tick in the “En” column

To remove the filter, right click on the line to be suppressed; the


following image exhibits the corresponding message:

Figure 31 - Message to remove a filter

• Add filter as TIMESTAMP: the program extracts the Timestamp of


the selected GOOSE and use it to filter messages. The following
image exhibits the “Filters” area:

Figure 32 - “Filters” area

The filter time can be changed, clicking on the “Value” column; the
following image exhibits the “Value” column:

Figure 33 - “Value” column


The Timestamp is the minimum time after which messages are
sensed and captured by the IEC61850-8 board. Any message with
UTC Time prior to the Filter time is discarded.
A name can be given to the filter by selecting the “Name” column
and writing an appropriate name. Click on the “En” column in order
to enable the Filter.
• Clear Gooses: the command allows clearing all GOOSE messages.
When selected, the following confirmation message is displayed:

Figure 34 - Confirmation message to delete all items

Answering “Yes”, the delete is completed


• Publishing: other two further selections are available as follows:
• Publish selected Goose/s
• Publish all Gooses
The explanation of the Publishing operation is provided in the
following paragraphs.
It is possible to set up to 8 filters, although only one at a time can be enabled.
All messages, which do not match a filter, are discarded.
At the start of an Exploring session, if the filters have been changed, a
message box asks to use the new filters or to leave the previous filters.
The following image exhibits the message box:

Figure 35 – Message for filters changing

Press “Yes”: the filter is set up. Next GOOSEs includes only the messages
matching with the filter.
For instance, select the GOOSE exhibited in the following image:

Figure 36 - Example of a GOOSE selection

Start an “Explore Now” session; the following image exhibits the “Goose
List”:

Figure 37 - Example of a GOOSE selection: "Goose List"


4.2.6 Substation File
By choosing the menu item “File/Open Substation File”, it is possible to open
the substation configuration file, which is produced by the Substation
manager using suitable software. At this point, it is possible to set the virtual
contacts to monitor the substation IED trip delays, to publish GOOSE
messages (also simulating faults), to subscribe GOOSE messages for the
semantic and synchronization checks of the GOOSE that are on the
substation network.
Go to “File”, and select “Open Substation File”. The following image exhibits
the “File/Open Substation File” selection:

Figure 38 - “File/Open Substation File” selection

Using the common dialogue window, select the desired file. The following
image exhibits the possible extensions for files, which can be opened:

Figure 39 - Possible extensions for files


Once selected, the program checks for the number of IED included in the
file. Usually there are more than one IED; so, the following image exhibits
the message displayed:

Figure 40 - Message displayed

Answering “No”, the program loads automatically all the GOOSE messages
in the IED file, going to the detriment of the loading speed of the file itself;
else, the following exhibits the page that is opened:

Figure 41 – “Yes” page

It is possible to do the following:


• Select the desired IED, by clicking by the side of the devices list
• Select all devices
• Unselect all the selected ones
• Invert the selection: selected IED are unselected, and vice versa
Press OK: the selection is applied to the substation data.
After selection, a new tab, called “Substation File”, is added to the “Goose
Explorer” page.
The following image exhibits the new tab in the “Goose Explorer” page:

Figure 42 - New tab in the “Goose Explorer” page

The following image exhibits the “Substation File” page:

Figure 43 - “Substation File” page

The page is similar to the “Exploring Goose” page, but it is not exactly the
same. It shows a table in the “Goose List” area that can be ordered by the
drop-down menu already seen.
The following image exhibits the drop-down menu to order the “Goose List”:

Figure 44 – Drop-down menu to order the “Goose List”

For each GOOSE that is displayed it shows the relative data structure in the
“Goose List” table.

The following image exhibits the “Goose List” table:

Figure 45 - “Goose List” table

The following table lists the elements of the “Goose List”:

Element Description

Dest. Mac Address Phusical address of the addressee of the message


Control Bloch
Identifier of the message type created by the IED
Reference
GOOSE ID Univocal identifier of the message

Dataset Name GOOSE message name


In the last column, there is advanced information
Last column
about the message
Table 11 – Elements of the “Goose List”
The following image exhibits the “Goose Details” area:

Figure 46 - “Goose Details” area

Two kinds of data are in the table: simple (DA) and complex (DO).
The following table lists the elements of the “Goose Details”:

Element Description
Messages numbering: when the type is DO, the number
#
has two digits
Second
Data type, DA or DO
column
Name Element name
Sign type (booleano, Unsigned, Signed, Float, etc.) of the
Type
element
Value Default value
Table 12 - Elements of the “Goose Details”

ATTENTION: The list of GOOSEs and relative details here


shown are not the result of an exploring session: they
represent the nominal configuration of the substation

Exactly as for the “Goose List” area in the “Exploring Goose” page, it is
possible to set filters by choosing a Dataset Reference or to use a detail to
add a Virtual Contact.
When selecting a GOOSE and right clicking on the table, a drop-down menu
appears. The following image exhibits the drop-down menu:

Figure 47 - Drop-down menu right clicking on the table


4.2.7 Virtual Contacts
Once the user has explored messages, be it with or without Filters, it is
possible to set the Virtual Contacts. These are not physical contacts, but they
are information about the trip delay, contained in the GOOSE message.
Before to start a test, in the lower part of the page, it is necessary to set the
logical conditions to stop the test. In case there are many virtual contacts, it
is possible to create complex AND masks (the first contacts that trips stops
the test), or OR masks (the test ends when the entire virtual contacts trip).
Before to start the test, almost one contact must be selected, as exhibit in
the following image:

Figure 48 – Virtual contact flag

The procedure to set-up virtual contacts, using an ABB relay (REL 670), is the
following:
• Select “Explore Now”, and press “Start exploring”; in the “Goose
List”, a number of messages are displayed
In the easy case, there are only GOOSE messages sent by a unique
IED, otherwise, it is necessary to select the correct message to set
the real trip virtual contact.
The following image exhibits a generated GOOSE by the relay and
the related details:

Figure 49 – Goose example and related details


• In alternative, it is possible to select “Explore at START”, and then
start a “Click and test” test. In this case, the messages are displayed
only after the trip and they include the trip information.
The following image exhibits a generated GOOSE by the relay and
the related details:

Figure 50 - Goose example and related details

• To set a virtual contact, it is necessary to right-click with the mouse


on the body of the message: the following image exhibits the
corresponding drop-down menu:

Figure 51 - Drop-down menu for bit 1

• Click on “Set virtual contact”: the signal is added to the “Virtual


Contacts” page. It is possible to add up to 64 virtual contacts.
The following image exhibits the “Virtual Contacts” page:

Figure 52 - “Virtual Contacts” page

The following identify the virtual contact:


• Name: it can be given by the user by editing the relative
box in the grid
• DatasetRef: univocal identifier of the virtual contact
• Type: it can be Boolean, Bit String, Unsigned, Signed, Float
or UTC Time
• Position: it is the position of the byte in the GOOSE body
• Condition: depending on the type of the data, it can be
one of the following:
• Equal to
• Less than
• Greater than
• Not Equal to
It allows selecting the univocal condition to monitor the trip
delay of the virtual contact
• Value: it is the corresponding value of the previous
condition
• Time: after having set the virtual contact and having
executed the test, the test set exhibits the measured trip
delay by the IEC61850 board
• To enable the test set for the trip delay measure of the set virtual
contacts, select “Use Virtual Contacts to STOP the test”. Optionally,
putting a flag in the box ”Ignore binary inputs C1-C12 to stop the
test”, the test set ignores the C1-C12 inputs to stop the test; the
following image exhibits the option ticked:

Figure 53 - ”Ignore binary inputs C1-C12 to stop the test” option ticked

In case the option ”Ignore binary inputs C1-C12 to stop the test” is
not selected, it is necessary to see the trip delay of the virtual
contacts in the filed “Time”, as shown in the following image:

Figure 54 – “Time” field in the “Virtual Contact” page


If the option ”Ignore binary inputs C1-C12 to stop the test” is
selected, the trip delay is in the “Test” page of the TDMS program,
as shown in the following image:

Figure 55 – “Test” table of the TDMS program


4.2.8 Publishing
Using the publishing option, the simulation of the message traffic of an
IEC 61850 network through the test set is possible.
In particular, it is possible to publish the captured GOOSEs of a previous
exploring session or, it is possible to publish the imported GOOSEs from one
or more SCL files. In both cases, it is possible to modify the value of the
GOOSE body, also using the Pre Fault-Fault conditions and vice versa.
In the first case, to publish a GOOSE, press the right button on the “Goose
List” in the “Exploring Goose” page and select one of the two possible
publishing options, as shown in the following image:

Figure 56 – Drop-down menu of the “Publishing” selection

In the second case, it is necessary to import one or more SCL file and select
the GOOSE to publish.
After the confirmation of the GOOSE to be published, the program copies
the selected GOOSE to the “Publishing Goose list”. The following image
exhibits the “Publishing Goose list” area:

Figure 57 - “Publishing Goose List” area

It is possible to set up to 64 different publishers. If the user tries to publish


more than the maximum number of publishers, a message appears.
The following image exhibits the message related to the maximum number
of gooses:

Figure 58 - Message related to the maximum number of gooses


There are two different publication modes: the first is a continuous mode
and it allows executing simple tests; the second allows simulating faults and
it requires a test execution. The following image exhibits the drop-down
menu to select the two possibilities:

Figure 59 –Drop-down menu for the publishing modes

The “Goose List” area enables the user to interactively define the message
to be published, depending on the selection performed in each column of
the area.
The following image exhibits the “Goose List” area:

Figure 60 - “Goose List” area

The following list is about the selections of the “Goose List” area:
• #. It represents the publisher port number. Up to 64 different ports
can be used at the same time; therefore, it is possible to publish 64
different GOOSEs. The port number cannot be selected by the user,
it is automatically selected by the software when a GOOSE is added
to the list of GOOSEs to be published
• Enabled. By clicking on the cell identified by this column, it is
possible to enable or disable the publishing of a GOOSE during a
publishing session. If the publisher is disabled, the entire row is
greyed-out and it is not possible to make any change until the
GOOSE is enabled again

• Status. A publisher can be in any of the two states: “Idle” or


“Running” . When the publisher is in running mode, then the
GOOSE is published according to the other selections in the grid.
The entire row is greyed-out and it is not possible to make any
further change. When DRTS XX is connected, by clicking the cell
identified by this column, it is possible to change the status of the
publisher from “Idle” to “Running” and from “Running” to “Idle”
• Dest MAC Address. This displays the Mac Address to which the
GOOSE is going to be destined
• Next column is actually the Control Block Reference
• Goose ID. Univocal identifier of the GOOSE
• Dataset name. Considering the same GOOSE ID, it is the name of
the data structure that composes the published message
• Test Mode. Clicking on the cell, it is possible to define if the GOOSE
is test type ( ), or not
• ndsCom (needs Commissioning). It is possible to mark the GOOSE
to publish, pointing out that the GOOSE is not already verified to
travel on the network
The following image exhibits the drop-down menu that appears upon right
clicking on a row of the area, to publish a GOOSE:

Figure 61 - Drop-down menu right clicking on a row


The following list is about the elements of the drop-down menu:
• The Remove Goose option deletes the GOOSE from the list of the
publishers
• The Duplicate Goose option creates a copy of the GOOSE in the list
of the publishers: this serves simulating message evolutions
• The Delete All Gooses option clears the publishers list upon
confirmation of the following window:

Figure 62 - Confirmation of “Delete All Gooses” option

• With the Set network parameters option, the following page is


opened:

Figure 63 - “Set network parameters” option page


It is necessary to set the univocal IP address, the Subnet mask, the
Gateway of the IEC 61850-8 board and the primary address
(optionally, also the secondary address), as follow:

Figure 64 - Example of possible addresses

Without these settings, the publishing can be performed; however,


the time assigned to GOOSEs is not synchronized with the
Substation time.
Before to execute the publishing of the GOOSEs, it is possible to modify the
values of the body of the messages to simulate the fault conditions or some
online anomaly.
In case the publishing mode is “Continuous”, the following image exhibits
the Boolean value variation:

Figure 65 - Boolean value variation

Similar variation is possible for the Unsigned, Signed, Float, Bitstring values.
For the modification of the 13 bit Bitstring of Quality type, it is possible to
open the following window:

Figure 66 – Modification of the filed Quality Bitstring

When the “During Test” transmission mode is selected, the new following
columns are displayed in the GOOSE list:

Figure 67 - “During Test” additional columns

• Prefault. By clicking on the cell identified by this column, it is


possible to define whether the GOOSE message is published as
desired, during the prefault section of the test. GOOSEs published
during this section normally simulate the presence of healthy
values on the line
• Fault. By clicking on the cell identified by this column, it is possible
to define whether the GOOSE is published as desired, during the
fault section of the test. As soon as a test starts, the GOOSE
message is published with a period rate so fast (ms). During the
simulation, this time frame rate is slower (at full speed, it is 5 s)
• Post fault. By clicking on the cell identified by this column, it is
possible to define whether the GOOSE is published as desired,
during the post fault section of the test. This cycle is generated by
the test set only if a positive time is set in the trip delay field of the
main program
For the Goose details, the value modification is perfectly similar to the
already explained modification; the only difference is the new columns in
the table, as shown in the following image:

Figure 68 – “Goose Details” columns

At the start of the publishing activity, only the first time, the following page
appears on the screen:

Figure 69 - SNTP server message


In case the IEC 61850-8 board is correctly synchronized with the SNTP
server, the GOOSEs are published with the timestamp generated by the
SNTP server.

To stop the publishing activity, press the button “Abort publishing”; this
action put all GOOSEs in the “idle” status.
4.2.9 Subscribing
Purpose of the Subscribing is to verify the semantic correctness and the
GOOSE messages synchronism in a network. It allows to the user to certify
the compliance to the IEC 61850-8 standard of a digital network.
One or more GOOSE to subscribe are initially read from a substation file.
Open the desired file, go to the Substation file folder, select the GOOSE to
subscribe and right click on it; the following image exhibits the
corresponding drop-down menu:

Figure 70 – “Subscribing” selections

Select “Subscribing”, and then choose the selected GOOSE or all of them.
Next, go to the “Goose Subscribing” tab.
The following image exhibits the “Goose Subscribing” tab:

Figure 71 - “Goose Subscribing” tab

In the top of the page, the following commands are available:


• Subscribed Goose list. The following image exhibits all the possible
messages:

Figure 72 – Message selection


The three selections available are the following:
• Show all gooses. This applies as a preliminary check
• Show only subscribed gooses. Default option, with whom
the GOOSE in the list are filtered and analysed
• Show only change of status of the subscribed gooses. In
case the Log file must have small dimensions, the program
displays only the status changes of the subscribed GOOSEs
• Ignore gooses with ‘Test Mode’ true/Ignore gooses with ‘Ndsc’
true. Select one of the two possible choices if “Test Mode” or
“Ndsc” GOOSEs are set, not to analyse the GOOSE themselves. The
following image exhibits the two options:

Figure 73 – Possible options for GOOSEs

• Maximum idle time/Time stamp tol. (s). The maximum idle time is
the interval in which the program waits for almost one subscribed
GOOSE message. The time stamp tolerance is the max error for the
timestamp fields, respect to the clock system. The following image
exhibits the two options:

Figure 74 – Time fields


The table in the middle of the page lists all the GOOSEs selected for the
subscribing.
In the bottom of the page, there is a second table with the information
related to the body of GOOSE messages (the table appears only after the
“Start Exploring” button pressing in the “Goose Exploring” page).
The following image exhibits the displayed messages in the second table:

Figure 75 - Displayed messages in the last table

If the subscribed message has not been found, this is all the information;
otherwise, other messages are displayed, explaining the problem.
The following table lists the icons of the second column:
Icon Description

This is an information message

This is an error message (the error has to be correct)

This is a serious error


Table 13 - Icons of the second column
The following image exhibits the summary of the warning messages,
obtained right clicking on the table:

Figure 76 - Summary of warning messages

This table is updated during the test.


A subscribing session starts pushing the button “Start exploring” and it stops
pushing the button “Stop exploring”.
It is possible to clear it or save the results (as .Log file), using the two options
shown in the Figure 77.
5 IEC61850-
IEC61850-9 OPTION
The standard IEC 61850-9 defines the characteristics of digital data to be
transmitted to protection relays instead of analog currents and voltages.
On the DRTS XX family, it is available an option, whose purpose is to allow
generating these digital data alone, or the analog and the digital data at the
meantime. It is also possible to monitor a physical relay contact, or the
GOOSE message exchanged on the IEC61850-8 interface.
The connection of the IEC 61850-9 digital signals to the relay under test is
made of two optical fibers, which are connected on the rear of the test set.
The following image exhibits the two optical fibers:

Figure 77 - Optical fibers connections

ATTENTION: The DRTS 66 TX connector is to be connected to


the relay RX connector, and vice versa

Connect the PC to the test set using the USB cable, start the TDMS program,
select one of the automatic test program of the relay, connect the PC to the
test set and press the icon “61850 9-LE”.
The following image exhibits the “61850 9-LE” icon:

Figure 78 - “61850 9-LE” icon


The following image exhibits the opened page:

Figure 79 - "IEC 61850-9" page

Select one of the following:


• Disabled: generation non enabled
• SVs & Amplifiers: the test set generate both the current/voltage
outputs from the front panel, and the digital signals from the rear
panel
• Sampled Values only: the test set generate only the digital signals
from the rear panel
The following image exhibits the related drop-down menu:

Figure 80 - Drop-down menu related to Sampled Values


The selection does not affect the further selection; however, with the first
choice, the optical fibers, current and voltage outputs are connected to the
relay under test, while with the second one only the optical fibers are
connected.
It is necessary to input the address of the relay under test, and a number of
data related to the relay settings.
The following image exhibits the settings to be inserted:

Figure 81 - Settings to be inserted

All the above information are to be asked to the Substation Manager.


This performed, there are three slots, 1, 2 and 3, where it is possible to
program the digital output generation. Each slot includes four currents and
four voltages: therefore, with this kind of simulation, the test set is capable
of generating up to 12 currents and 12 voltages at the meantime.
The following image exhibits the “Slot 1” (the three slots are identical):

Figure 82 - "Slot 1"

The slot is divided in two parts as follows:


• In the upper part, there are other data to be asked to the
Substation Manager (referred to the header). The following image
exhibits the upper part:

Figure 83 - Upper part of the "Slot 1"


ATTENTION: For the ISA relay, the critical parameters
are the following:
• Sampled Value ID: it must be 15 characters long
• VLAN ID: 1 for Slot 1; 2 for slot 2; 3 for slot 3

• In the lower part, there are the data related to the relay
connection.
The following image exhibits the lower part of the “Slot 1”:

Figure 84 - Lower part of the "Slot 1"

The following table lists the elements of the lower part:


Name Description
The nominal plant frequency; usually 50 Hz or 60
Nominal frequency
Hz
It is possible to generate 80 or 256 samples for
Number of samples
period
Nominal primary L-L Nominal voltage on the primary side. The unit of
voltage measurement is kV
Nominal secondary L-L Nominal voltage on the secondary side. The unit
voltage of measurement is V
Nominal current on the primary side. The unit of
Nominal primary current
measurement is A
Nominal current on the secondary side. The unit
Nominal secondary current
of measurement is A
Table 14 - Elements of the lower part of the “Slot 1” (1/2)
Name Description
Number of phases If the selection with amplifiers is selected,
the value is not editable, because the
number of digital generated channels must
be the same of the current and voltage
outputs of the test set; if the selection with
only sample values is selected, it is possible
to edit how many signals have to be
generated for every single slot
Current Description x Description of currents and voltages of the
Voltage description x various phases
Table 15 - Elements of the lower part of the “Slot 1” (2/2)

This performed, come back to the “Connected AP” tab, and press OK.
The following image exhibits message displayed:

Figure 85 - Message displayed

After the file has been transmitted, it is possible to return to the normal test
execution, like with the normal current generation: instead of generating
currents and voltage, the test set is transmitting digital data to the relay
under test, which reacts as usual, and the usual tests is performed.

IMPORTANT: The standard considers the value generation of


the primary side
The results table and the related diagram do not change their layout.
The following image exhibits the result obtained with “Sampled Values
only”:

Figure 86 – Results with sample values only


6 DRTS9 OPTION
DRTS9 is a three phase current generator, which allows generating nine
currents in all from DRTS 64 or DRTS 66.
The device is connected to DRTS 64 or DRTS 66, and converts three voltage
outputs into current outputs. The output current follows the burden; so, it
has to be adjusted before testing. The current value is displayed by three
current meters.
The following image exhibits the connection between DRTS9 and
DRTS 64/66:

Figure 87 - DRTS9 and DRTS64/66 connection

Three voltage outputs are connected to DRTS9 with the cable provided, and
are converted into current. However, DRTS9 is not a current generator: it is
a low voltage high current generator.
The output current follows the burden.
The following table lists the necessary steps to obtain the test current:

Step Description
After the connection to the relay under test, generate 10 V on the
1
connected DRTS 64/66 voltage outputs
On the DRTS9 displays, read the corresponding output currents:
• I10-A
2
• I10-B
• I10-C
Compute the trans-impedance for each phase, applying the following
formula:
3

Z(A, B, C) =
,,

Compute the voltage to be generated in order to obtain the desired


test current.
4 If it is the test current, the corresponding test voltage Vt-A, B, C is the
following:
Vt-A, B, C = It * Z(A, B, C)
Table 16 - Steps to obtain the test current

Note: usually the differences between I10-A, B and C are very small; so, the
computation can be performed only one time

Generate 10 V
DRTS9 meters display a current of 0.9 A

To generate 5 A => Z = = 11.1 Ohm
.
Vt = 5 * 11.1 = 55.5 V

The option is operated using the MANUAL test module of the TDMS
software suite. If the purpose is to perform a three-winding transformer
differential protection, in order to know which values should be generated,
in terms of amplitude and phase, open the DIFFERENTIAL-87 module, input
the relay settings, decide the test points, and read current and phase values
in the Test page.
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1 - AMI 632: FRONT PANEL ................................................................. 130
FIGURE 2 - DRTS XX, AMI 632 AND RELAY CONNECTION ..................................... 133
FIGURE 3 - DRTS XX, AMI 632 AND RELAY CONNECTION ..................................... 134
FIGURE 4 - DRTS XX, AMI 632 AND RELAY CONNECTION ..................................... 134
FIGURE 5 – SYNCHRONIZATION OF TWO DISTANCE RELAY....................................... 135
FIGURE 6 - GPS ANTENNA ............................................................................... 137
FIGURE 7 - IRIG-B CONNECTOR ....................................................................... 138
FIGURE 8 – EXTERNAL GPS OPTION: FRONT PANEL .............................................. 139
FIGURE 9 - EXTERNAL GPS OPTION: REAR PANEL ................................................. 140
FIGURE 10 - CONNECTION BETWEEN DRTS XX AND RELAY .................................... 141
FIGURE 11 - OPTION AND OPTICAL FIBER ............................................................ 143
FIGURE 12 - TEST OF LINE DIFFERENTIAL RELAYS................................................... 143
FIGURE 13 - CONNECTIONS BETWEEN DRTS XX AND A RELAY (ABB REL670) .......... 146
FIGURE 14 - "IEC61580" ICON ....................................................................... 149
FIGURE 15 - "GOOSE EXPLORER" PAGE (TEST SET NOT CONNECTED) ........................ 149
FIGURE 16 - "GOOSE EXPLORER" PAGE (TEST SET CONNECTED) .............................. 150
FIGURE 17 - FILE DROP-DOWN MENU ................................................................ 151
FIGURE 18 - “EXPLORER OPTIONS” AREA ........................................................... 153
FIGURE 19 - “EXPLORE AT START” SELECTED: “GOOSE LIST” .................................. 154
FIGURE 20 – DOWNLOAD MESSAGE .................................................................. 154
FIGURE 21 - “START EXPLORING” BUTTON ......................................................... 155
FIGURE 22 - “EXPLORE NOW” SELECTED: “GOOSE LIST” FRAME ............................. 155
FIGURE 23 - CHANGE OF THE “START EXPLORING” BUTTON ................................... 156
FIGURE 24 - “LOG ACTIVITY” AREA ................................................................... 156
FIGURE 25 - “GOOSE LIST” AND ELEMENTS DISPLAYED.......................................... 157
FIGURE 26 - “ORDER GOOSE LIST BY” DROP-DOWN MENU .................................... 158
FIGURE 27 - “GOOSE DETAILS” AREA ................................................................ 158
FIGURE 28 - “GOOSE LIST” DROP-DOWN MENU .................................................. 159
FIGURE 29 - “FILTERS” AREA ........................................................................... 159
FIGURE 30 - TICK IN THE “EN” COLUMN............................................................. 160
FIGURE 31 - MESSAGE TO REMOVE A FILTER ....................................................... 160
FIGURE 32 - “FILTERS” AREA ........................................................................... 160
FIGURE 33 - “VALUE” COLUMN ........................................................................ 160
FIGURE 34 - CONFIRMATION MESSAGE TO DELETE ALL ITEMS.................................. 161
FIGURE 35 – MESSAGE FOR FILTERS CHANGING ................................................... 162
FIGURE 36 - EXAMPLE OF A GOOSE SELECTION .................................................. 162
FIGURE 37 - EXAMPLE OF A GOOSE SELECTION: "GOOSE LIST" ............................. 162
FIGURE 38 - “FILE/OPEN SUBSTATION FILE” SELECTION ........................................ 163
FIGURE 39 - POSSIBLE EXTENSIONS FOR FILES ...................................................... 163
FIGURE 40 - MESSAGE DISPLAYED..................................................................... 164
FIGURE 41 – “YES” PAGE ................................................................................ 164
FIGURE 42 - NEW TAB IN THE “GOOSE EXPLORER” PAGE ....................................... 165
FIGURE 43 - “SUBSTATION FILE” PAGE .............................................................. 165
FIGURE 44 – DROP-DOWN MENU TO ORDER THE “GOOSE LIST” ............................. 166
FIGURE 45 - “GOOSE LIST” TABLE ..................................................................... 166
FIGURE 46 - “GOOSE DETAILS” AREA ................................................................ 167
FIGURE 47 - DROP-DOWN MENU RIGHT CLICKING ON THE TABLE............................. 168
FIGURE 48 – VIRTUAL CONTACT FLAG ................................................................ 169
FIGURE 49 – GOOSE EXAMPLE AND RELATED DETAILS ........................................... 169
FIGURE 50 - GOOSE EXAMPLE AND RELATED DETAILS ............................................ 170
FIGURE 51 - DROP-DOWN MENU FOR BIT 1 ........................................................ 170
FIGURE 52 - “VIRTUAL CONTACTS” PAGE ........................................................... 171
FIGURE 53 - ”IGNORE BINARY INPUTS C1-C12 TO STOP THE TEST” OPTION TICKED ..... 172
FIGURE 54 – “TIME” FIELD IN THE “VIRTUAL CONTACT” PAGE................................ 172
FIGURE 55 – “TEST” TABLE OF THE TDMS PROGRAM........................................... 173
FIGURE 56 – DROP-DOWN MENU OF THE “PUBLISHING” SELECTION........................ 174
FIGURE 57 - “PUBLISHING GOOSE LIST” AREA ..................................................... 175
FIGURE 58 - MESSAGE RELATED TO THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF GOOSES .................. 175
FIGURE 59 –DROP-DOWN MENU FOR THE PUBLISHING MODES ............................... 176
FIGURE 60 - “GOOSE LIST” AREA ...................................................................... 176
FIGURE 61 - DROP-DOWN MENU RIGHT CLICKING ON A ROW ................................. 177
FIGURE 62 - CONFIRMATION OF “DELETE ALL GOOSES” OPTION............................. 178
FIGURE 63 - “SET NETWORK PARAMETERS” OPTION PAGE ..................................... 178
FIGURE 64 - EXAMPLE OF POSSIBLE ADDRESSES ................................................... 179
FIGURE 65 - BOOLEAN VALUE VARIATION ........................................................... 179
FIGURE 66 – MODIFICATION OF THE FILED QUALITY BITSTRING .............................. 180
FIGURE 67 - “DURING TEST” ADDITIONAL COLUMNS ............................................ 180
FIGURE 68 – “GOOSE DETAILS” COLUMNS ......................................................... 181
FIGURE 69 - SNTP SERVER MESSAGE................................................................. 181
FIGURE 70 – “SUBSCRIBING” SELECTIONS........................................................... 183
FIGURE 71 - “GOOSE SUBSCRIBING” TAB ........................................................... 184
FIGURE 72 – MESSAGE SELECTION .................................................................... 184
FIGURE 73 – POSSIBLE OPTIONS FOR GOOSES ................................................... 185
FIGURE 74 – TIME FIELDS ................................................................................ 185
FIGURE 77 - DISPLAYED MESSAGES IN THE LAST TABLE .......................................... 186
FIGURE 76 - SUMMARY OF WARNING MESSAGES ................................................. 187
FIGURE 77 - OPTICAL FIBERS CONNECTIONS ........................................................ 188
FIGURE 78 - “61850 9-LE” ICON .................................................................... 188
FIGURE 79 - "IEC 61850-9" PAGE ................................................................... 189
FIGURE 80 - DROP-DOWN MENU RELATED TO SAMPLED VALUES ............................ 189
FIGURE 81 - SETTINGS TO BE INSERTED .............................................................. 190
FIGURE 82 - "SLOT 1" .................................................................................... 191
FIGURE 83 - UPPER PART OF THE "SLOT 1" ......................................................... 191
FIGURE 84 - LOWER PART OF THE "SLOT 1" ........................................................ 192
FIGURE 85 - MESSAGE DISPLAYED..................................................................... 193
FIGURE 86 – RESULTS WITH SAMPLE VALUES ONLY ............................................... 194
FIGURE 87 - DRTS9 AND DRTS64/66 CONNECTION ........................................... 195
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE 1 - STEPS FOR THE CONNECTION OF DRTS XX TO AMI 332/632 (1/2) ......... 131
TABLE 2 - STEPS FOR THE CONNECTION OF DRTS XX TO AMI 332/632 (2/2) ......... 132
TABLE 3 - COMPONENTS OF THE FRONT PANEL .................................................... 139
TABLE 4 - COMPONENTS OF THE REAR PANEL ...................................................... 140
TABLE 5 - SELECTIONS ON THE “GOOSE EXPLORER” PAGE (1/2) ............................. 150
TABLE 6 - SELECTIONS ON THE “GOOSE EXPLORER” PAGE (2/2) ............................. 151
TABLE 7 - SELECTIONS IN THE FILE DROP-DOWN MENU ......................................... 152
TABLE 8 - AVAILABLE TABS .............................................................................. 152
TABLE 9 - SELECTIONS OF THE “EXPLORER OPTIONS” AREA .................................... 153
TABLE 10 - “GOOSE LIST” ELEMENTS................................................................. 157
TABLE 11 – ELEMENTS OF THE “GOOSE LIST” ..................................................... 166
TABLE 12 - ELEMENTS OF THE “GOOSE DETAILS”................................................. 167
TABLE 13 - ICONS OF THE SECOND COLUMN ........................................................ 186
TABLE 14 - ELEMENTS OF THE LOWER PART OF THE “SLOT 1” (1/2) ........................ 192
TABLE 15 - ELEMENTS OF THE LOWER PART OF THE “SLOT 1” (2/2) ........................ 193
TABLE 16 - STEPS TO OBTAIN THE TEST CURRENT ................................................. 196
DRTS XX FAMILY
Chapter
CHAPTER 4 – LOCAL CONTROL 4
LOCAL CONTROL

DOCUMENT No. MIE10170, Rev. 1.33, March 2015


TABLE OF CONTENTS
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 4 – LOCAL CONTROL .............................................................. 201
1 CONTROL PANEL AND DISPLAY ...................................................... 205
2 MAIN CONTROL SCREEN ................................................................ 209
3 GENERAL SELECTIONS .................................................................... 212
3.1 LOAD TESTS.................................................................................... 213
3.2 SAVE RESULTS ................................................................................ 216
4 DIAGNOSTIC STEPS ........................................................................ 219
Page left intentionally blank.
1 CONTROL PANEL AND DISPLAY
DISPLAY
The following image exhibits the components allowing the local test set
control:

Figure 1 - Front panel

The following table lists the components of the front panel:

ITEM Component Additional info

1 Local control function keys Five cut-through keys

2 Color display Large, color graphic

3 Digital input knob with switch To access selections


Twelve keys keyboard, for the
15 Alphanumeric
local control
Power-on alarm lights (ground
16
missing, supply too high)
17 Power-on push-button

18 Power-on light
Table 1 - Components of the front panel
The following table lists the five cut-through keys functions:
Key Function Description
Pressing F5 (SHIFT), and F1 open the Help
?
F1 page
Pressing it the test is started
In the “Amplifier Diagnostic report” page,
START
with the “Meas.” Selection, pressing START
pre-fault values are generated
F2 Pressing F5 (SHIFT), and F2 go to next tab, if
TAB
available
Pressing it the test is stopped, and parameters
STOP
go to the healthy values
Pressing F5 (SHIFT), and F3 leave the alpha-
numeric parameter under programming
F3 ESC Staying in the “Amplifier Diagnostic report”
page, pressing F5 (SHIFT), and F3 it is possible
to leave the page
Pressing it the test is stopped, and all
RESET parameters go to zero, including the DC
voltage
Pressing F5 (SHIFT) and F4 select the
parameter under programming, shown with a
F4 SEL red background. In the Dragging test mode,
the selected parameters are adjusted
simultaneously
Pressing it, enter a parameter, or the
ENTER
parameter under programming is accepted
It allows the second selection on F1 to F4 (it
acts as SHIFT)
It allows the second selections of the
F5
following:
SHIFT • 4 (open)
• 6 (save)
• left arrow (minus)
• 0 (delete)
right arrow (decimal point)
Table 2 - Cut-through keys functions
The following table lists the twelve alphanumeric keys functions:

Key Description

1, a, b, c

2, d, e, f

3 ,g, h, i

4, j, k, l, “Open”

5, m, n, o

6, p, q, r, s, “Save”

7, t, u, v

8, w, x , y, z

9, ˟, ˽, #

Left arrow, -

0, “Delete”

Right arrow, .

Table 3 - Twelve alphanumeric keys functions


The following table lists the steps to control the DRTS XX:
ITEM Component
Rotate the knob with switch until the highlighted part of the
1
screen reaches the desired selection or parameter
To access the selected parameter, press the knob or press the
2
ENTER key F4
Input the desired values by the keyboard or rotating the knob,
and accept them by pressing the knob or the ENTER function
key F4
• The minus sign is introduced by pressing SHIFT (F5) and left arrow
3 on the keyboard
• The last digit can be deleted by pressing SHIFT (F5) and 0 on the
keyboard
• The decimal point is introduced by pressing SHIFT (F5) and right
arrow on the keyboard
If the field is alphanumeric, such as inputting the header, the
4 keyboard becomes alphanumeric; different letters can be input
as with a portable phone keyboard
Continue to select different pages until the desired one has
been reached. After have operating on it, return to the former
5 page reaching the following symbol (return):

Start the test by pressing the START function key F1


6 Stop the test by pressing the STOP function key F2
Reset all outputs by pressing the RESET function key F3
If the test is finished, press the “Save Results” button in the
7 “Setup” menu, and the test result is saved into the local or USB
memory
It is also possible to prepare a test plan using the TDMS
software on the PC, and then loading it from the USB memory
8
The upload operation is started selecting “Load Tests” in the
“Setup” menu
Table 4 - Steps to control the DRTS XX
2 MAIN CONTROL SCREEN
The following table lists the initial steps of the power-on activities:

Step Description Display

Program memory check


1
Automatic memory checking

Starting up and Peripherals Check


The page informs about the good/bad
status of the boards of the DRTS XX.
2 • Green dot: OK
• Grey dot: missing or wrong
The program continues in any case:
please, check that everything is OK

Main Control Screen


3 At the end of the diagnostic, the main
control screen is displayed

Table 5 - Initial steps of the power-on activities


The following image exhibits the Main Control Screen:

Figure 2 - Main Control Screen

The following table lists the available selection on the Main Control screen:

Item Description Display


Manual Control (Chapter 5)
The selection allows performing relay
1
tests by manually controlling the test
parameters
Distance ANSI 21 (Chapter 6)
2 The selection is dedicated to the manual
and automated test of distance relays
Overcurrent ANSI 50-51 (Chapter 7)
3 The selection is dedicated to the manual
and automated test of overcurrent relays
Header (Chapter 8.1)
4 The selection allows inputting the test
reference data (relay type, operator, etc.)
Auxiliary Settings (Chapter 8.2)
5 The selection allows setting the DC
supply and the burden impedance
Table 6 - Available selection on the Main Control screen (1/2)
Item Description Display
Circuit Breaker (Chapter 8.3)
This selection allows simulating the
6
intervention of the circuit breaker
after the relay trip
Amplifiers Diagnostic Report
(Chapter 8.4)
7
This selection allows verifying many
parameters of the device
Save
Save into the Non-Volatile memory
the following settings (which are
displayed at the next power-on):
• For the Manual test: maximum
time, CB delay, auxiliary DC
supply. In particular with this
8 command it is possible to save
the Nominal Frequency of 50 or
60 Hz
• For the Distance relay tests: all
the setup parameters
• For the Overcurrent relay tests:
all the setup parameters
• The test header
Configuration (Chapter 8.6)
9
Test set utilities
Table 7 - Available selection on the Main Control screen (2/2)
3 GENERAL SELECTIONS
The following table lists the general selections, valid for all pages, of the
Local Control:
Selection/
Display
Description
Help Icon
It is placed in the upper corner of each page and
it allows to open the Help menu
Press the function key F5 (SHIFT) + F1
Start
Pressing it, all parameters are generated and a
new test line is added to the Test table. Test is
stopped as the relay trips, or as the maximum
time is reached; the corresponding Test table line
becomes green. However, if during test execution
the Stop or Reset buttons are pressed, or if a fault
is sensed, the test line is deleted, and parameters
can be modified if necessary
Stop
Pressing it at any moment, fault values go to the
Prefault values
Reset
Pressing it at any moment, fault values go to zero,
including the auxiliary DC supply
Exit
Pressing it at any moment, all values go to zero,
including the auxiliary DC supply, and the display
goes back to the selection page
Load Tests
It is possible to import the results from the local
memory or from an USB
Save Results
It is possible to save the results in the local
memory or in an USB
Table 8 - General selections of the Local Control
3.1 Load Tests
The following image exhibits the Load Tests selection for the “Setup” page
of the Manual Control, Distance ANSI 21 and Overcurrent ANSI 50-51:

Figure 3 – “Setup” page of Man. Control, Dist. ANSI 21, Over. ANSI 50-51

It allows to load a test result previously saved into the local or the USB
memory, and to use it to repeat the test. It is also possible to prepare a test
plan using the TDMS software on the PC, and then loading it from the USB
memory.
The following image exhibits the page opened after the selection of the
“Load Tests”:

Figure 4 – “Load Tests” page

The page exhibits the directory of files recorded in the Local Memory or in
the USB Key.
The following table lists the necessary steps to run a test in the memory:

Step Description
Pressing the knob, first select the source (local memory or key)
1 then enter the list, and scroll it until reaching the desired setting
file, whose extension is .D66

2 Press F5 (SHIFT) and F4: the program downoalds the selected file

Download confirming message:

Start the test pressing Start in the Test window (all tests are
4
repeated)
Table 9 - Steps to run a test in the memory
The following table lists the available selections in the upper part of the file
list:
Selection
Display
Description
ESC
It allows to leave the directory, and to go to another
one, as necessary

It allows to exit the page
Table 10 - Selections in the upper part of the file list

ATTENTION: If the file name of the file is longer than the


window, it is possible also to scroll it with the horizontal bar
3.2 Save Results
The following image exhibits the Save Results selection for the “Setup” page
of the Manual Control, Distance ANSI 21 and Overcurrent ANSI 50-51:

Figure 5 – “Setup” page of Man. Control, Dist. ANSI 21, Over. ANSI 50-51

This selection allows saving the test result at the end of a test.
The following image exhibits the page opened after the selection of “Save
Results”:

Figure 6 –“Save Results” page

The page exhibits the directory of files recorded in the Local Memory or in
the USB Key.
The following table lists the necessary steps to save a test in the memory:

Step Description

1 Input the file name

Pressing the knob, first select the destination (local memory or


2 key), then enter the list, and scroll it until reaching the desired
directory

3 Press F5 (SHIFT) and 6: the program saves the file

If the file name is not acceptable, the following message is


displayed:

Until the file name is not changed, it is not possible to proceed


Table 11 - Steps to save a test in the memory
The following table lists the first two icons in the upper part of the file list:
Selection
Display
Description
ESC
It allows to leave the directory, and to go to another
one, as necessary

It allows to exit the page
Table 12 - Icons in the upper part of the file list

ATTENTION: Test results can also be saved on the Status page


(see Chapter 5.4 for the Manual Control, Chapter 6.4 for the
Distance ANSI 21 and the Chapter 7.4 for the Overcurrent
ANSI 50-51)
4 DIAGNOSTIC STEPS
The following table lists the diagnostic steps after the power-on of the
DRTS XX to verify that all components are correctly fit and operational:

Step Description Display

Hit any key to download


Hitting a key as soon as the window is
1 opened, the download session starts. It
allows upgrading the local firmware by
using the UPGRADE 66 software

Firmware modules
2 The screen lists the key firmware
modules, with their revision number

Action Request Waiting


3 After a short while, a message tells that
the test set is waiting for the new files

Table 13 - Diagnostic steps after power-on (1/2)


Step Description Display
F1 Modules List
Pressing F1 and keeping it pressed, the
4 software modules list is displayed;
releasing the key it is possible to come
back to the waiting message
F2 Reboot
5 Once the upgrade is finished, pressing F2
the program starts from the beginning
ATTENTION: For further information about the upgrade process,
please refer to the software manual
Table 14 - Diagnostic steps after power-on (2/2)
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1 - FRONT PANEL ................................................................................ 205
FIGURE 2 - MAIN CONTROL SCREEN .................................................................. 210
FIGURE 3 – “SETUP” PAGE OF MAN. CONTROL, DIST. ANSI 21, OVER. ANSI 50-51 213
FIGURE 4 – “LOAD TESTS” PAGE....................................................................... 214
FIGURE 5 – “SETUP” PAGE OF MAN. CONTROL, DIST. ANSI 21, OVER. ANSI 50-51 216
FIGURE 6 –“SAVE RESULTS” PAGE .................................................................... 217
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE 1 - COMPONENTS OF THE FRONT PANEL .................................................... 205
TABLE 2 - CUT-THROUGH KEYS FUNCTIONS ......................................................... 206
TABLE 3 - TWELVE ALPHANUMERIC KEYS FUNCTIONS............................................. 207
TABLE 4 - STEPS TO CONTROL THE DRTS XX ....................................................... 208
TABLE 5 - INITIAL STEPS OF THE POWER-ON ACTIVITIES .......................................... 209
TABLE 6 - AVAILABLE SELECTION ON THE MAIN CONTROL SCREEN (1/2) .................. 210
TABLE 7 - AVAILABLE SELECTION ON THE MAIN CONTROL SCREEN (2/2) .................. 211
TABLE 8 - GENERAL SELECTIONS OF THE LOCAL CONTROL ...................................... 212
TABLE 9 - STEPS TO RUN A TEST IN THE MEMORY.................................................. 214
TABLE 10 - SELECTIONS IN THE UPPER PART OF THE FILE LIST .................................. 215
TABLE 11 - STEPS TO SAVE A TEST IN THE MEMORY ............................................... 217
TABLE 12 - ICONS IN THE UPPER PART OF THE FILE LIST .......................................... 218
TABLE 13 - DIAGNOSTIC STEPS AFTER POWER-ON (1/2) ........................................ 219
TABLE 14 - DIAGNOSTIC STEPS AFTER POWER-ON (2/2) ........................................ 220
DRTS XX FAMILY
Chapter 5
CHAPTER 5 – LOCAL CONTROL: MANUAL CONTROL
LOCAL CONTROL:
MANUAL CONTROL

DOCUMENT No. MIE10170, Rev. 1.33, March 2015


TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 5 – LOCAL CONTROL: MANUAL CONTROL.............................. 223
1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................. 227
2 SETUP ............................................................................................ 228
2.1 SETUP/PREFAULT ............................................................................ 230
2.1.1 Setup/Prefault/Values ......................................................... 231
2.1.2 Setup/Prefault/Auxiliary ...................................................... 233
2.2 SETUP/BINARY I/O.......................................................................... 237
2.2.1 Setup/Binary I/O/C1-C6 and C7-C12 ................................... 238
2.2.2 Setup/Binary I/O/Aux .......................................................... 243
2.3 SETUP/IN-3 CDG ........................................................................... 244
2.4 SETUP/TEST TYPE ............................................................................ 245
2.4.1 Setup/Test type/Shot........................................................... 246
2.4.2 Setup/Test type/Ramp ........................................................ 247
2.4.3 Setup/Test type/Delta ......................................................... 252
2.4.4 Setup/Test type/Dragging ................................................... 256
2.4.5 Setup/Cycle Type ................................................................. 256
2.4.5.1 Setup/Cycle Type/Fault ................................................ 257
2.4.5.2 Setup/Cycle Type/Prefault-Fault-Zero ......................... 258
2.4.5.3 Setup/Cycle Type/Prefault-Fault-Prefault .................... 259
2.4.5.4 Setup/Cycle Type/Fault-Zero ....................................... 259
2.4.5.5 Setup/Cycle Type/Fault-Prefault .................................. 259
2.5 SETUP/TIMES ................................................................................. 260
3 TEST ............................................................................................... 261
3.1 TEST/SHOT, RAMP OR DELTA ............................................................ 262
3.2 TEST/DRAGGING ............................................................................. 267
4 STATUS .......................................................................................... 271
Page left intentionally blank.
1 INTRODUCTION
The following image exhibits the Home page of the “Manual Control”
selection:

Figure 1 – “Manual Control” Home page

The following table lists the tabs of the “Manual Control” Home page:

Tab Chapter Display

Setup 2

Test 3

Status 4
Table 1 - Tabs of the “Manual Control” Home page

Each tab has more sections.


2 SETUP
The following image exhibits the “Setup” page:

Figure 2 – “Setup” page

The following table lists the selections of the “Setup” page:

Selection Chapter Display

Prefault 2.1

Binary I/O 2.2

IN-3 CDG 2.3

Test Type 2.4

Table 2 - Selections of the “Setup” page (1/2)


Selection Chapter Display

Cycle Type 2.5

Times 2.6

Table 3 - Selections of the “Setup” page (1/2)


2.1 Setup/Prefault
The following image exhibits the “Prefault” page:

Figure 3 - "Prefault" page

The prefault panel is used to define the prefault values that are generated
before the fault, and that correspond to the “healthy” situation of the
system.
The following table lists the tabs of the “Prefault” page:

Tab Chapter Display

Values 2.1.1

Auxiliary 2.1.2
Table 4 - Tabs of the “Prefault” page
2.1.1 Setup/Prefault/Values
The following table lists the selections of the “Values” tab:
Selection
Display
Description
Voltage and current values
For each output, it is possible to select the
following:
• Amplitude (V or A)
• Phase Φ(°)
• Frequency f(Hz)
Voltages range: 0÷300,000 V
Currents range: 0÷10,000 A
Angles range: 0÷360.0°
Frequency range (current outputs):
0÷2999.999 Hz
Frequency range (voltage outputs):
• 0÷3 kHz at 0÷60 V
• Up to 2 kHz at 0÷100 V
• Up to 700 Hz at 0÷300 V
Note 1: the prefault current is limited to
10 A
Note 2: if frequency is not the same on all
outputs, selected angles apply only to test
start; then, angles shift as a function of
the frequency difference
Note3: fault values can have any value,
regardless to prefault ones
DC Supply
It is the voltage supply of the relay under
test; it can be programmed from 12 V to
260 V
Table 5 - elections of the “Values” tab (1/2)
Selection
Display
Description
Prefault Duration
When a sequence of tests is programmed, two tests
can be executed immediately one after the other.
The relay cannot have the time to reset, creating a
lockout situation. Therefore, it is necessary to
program the prefault duration, which should not be
zero: the default is 0.1 s.
The following diagram exhibits the
Prefault/Fault/Prefault cycle:

Apply V DC
The auxiliary DC voltage supply is generated: the
relay is powered-on, and it is possible to read or
modify its settings. This command generates only the
programmed DC voltage
Generate Prefault
All prefault values are generated: the relay is
powered-on, and it detects a normal situation. This
command generates also the programmed DC
voltage
OK
The selected prefault vales are accepted, but not
generated, and the window is closed. Parameters are
added to the test program. Before pressing OK,
select the Auxiliary tab for the definition of the
auxiliary contacts in the prefault conditions
Table 6 - Selections of the “Values” tab (2/2)
2.1.2 Setup/Prefault/Auxiliary
The following image exhibits the “Auxiliary” page:

Figure 4 - "Auxiliary" page

The “Auxiliary” page allows setting the prefault auxiliary outputs.


The test set has four relay outputs on the front panel, marked A1 to A4, and
four solid state outputs on the round connector in the rear of the test set,
called A5 to A8.
The following image exhibits the relay outputs (4) A1÷A4 on the front panel
of the test set:

Figure 5 - Relay outputs (4) A1÷A4


The following image exhibits the round connector (26) in the rear part of the
test set with the solid-state outputs A5÷A8:

Figure 6 –Round connector (26) with solid state outputs A5÷A8

For both of them, it is possible to decide whether the normal situation is to


have the contact Open or Closed before the test. For instance, if it is
necessary to generate the CB Open and Closed position signals, the first one
is open and the other one is closed before the fault injection.
The following image exhibits the upper part of the “Auxiliary” tab related to
the relay outputs and the solid-state outputs:

Figure 7 - "Auxiliary" tab: relay outputs and the solid-state outputs

IMPORTANT: For relay outputs, as Normal Open and Normal


Closed contacts are both available on the front panel, you can
avoid this selection
The following table lists the selections of the lower part of the “Auxiliary”
page:
Selection
Display
Description
DC Supply
It is the voltage supply of the relay under
test; it can be programmed from 12 V to
260 V
Prefault Duration
When a sequence of tests is programmed,
two tests can be executed immediately
one after the other.
The relay cannot have the time to reset,
creating a lockout situation. Therefore, it
is necessary to program the prefault
duration, which should not be zero: the
default is 0.1 s.
The following diagram exhibits the
Prefault/Fault/Prefault cycle:

Table 7 - Selections of the lower part of the “Auxiliary” tab (1/2)


Selection
Display
Description
Generate Prefault
All prefault values are generated: the
relay is powered-on, and it detects a
normal situation. This command
generates also the programmed DC
voltage
Apply V DC
The auxiliary DC voltage supply is
generated: the relay is powered-on, and it
is possible to read or modify its settings.
This command generates only the
programmed DC voltage
OK
The selected prefault vales are accepted,
but not generated, and the window is
closed. Parameters are added to the test
program. Before pressing OK, select the
Auxiliary tab for the definition of the
auxiliary contacts in the prefault
conditions
Table 8 - Selections of the lower part of the “Auxiliary” tab (2/2)
2.2 Setup/Binary I/O
The following image exhibits the “Fault I/O Settings” page:

Figure 8 - "Fault I/O Settings" page

This page allows setting trip inputs and auxiliary outputs for the test
execution.

Do not mistake the “Aux” selection with the “Auxiliary” of the


“Prefault” selection: this is fault; the other one is prefault

The following table lists the tabs of the “Fault I/O Settings” page:

Tab Chapter Display

C1-C6
2.2.1
C7-C12

Aux 2.2.2
Table 9 - Tabs of the “Fault I/O Settings” page
2.2.1 Setup/Binary I/O/C1-
I/O/C1-C6 and C7-
C7-C12
Purpose of these two tabs is to define all available selections regarding
inputs to be monitored during the test, and the way in which trip inputs stop
the timer.
With the Input board, digital inputs are divided into six groups of two each,
with the same common:
• C1-C2
• C3-C4
• C5-C6
• C7-C8
• C9-C10
• C11-C12
With the TRANSCOPE board, digital inputs are divided into five groups of
two each, with the same common:
• C1-C2
• C3-C4
• C5-C6
• C9-C10
• C11-C12
With TRANSCOPE, C7 and C8 sockets are available on the front panel, but
they are not connected.
If the “Circuit Breaker Simulation parameters” in the “Circuit Breaker” page
is enabled and if the “CB Close command” is selected “On input C12”, inputs
C11 and C12 are not available for trip time measurement.
The following image exhibits the “Circuit Breaker” page with the previous
selections:

Figure 9 - “Circuit Breaker” page

The following table lists the selections of the lower part of the “C1-C6” or
“C7-C12” tabs:
Selection
Display
Description
Start timer
By pressing the arrows, the following selections are
available:
• Injection: the timer starts as fault parameters
are applied. The following image exhibits the
time measurement

• CX Trip (C1 Trip to C12 Trip): the timer starts as the selected input
trips
• CX Reset (C1 Reset to C12 Reset): the timer starts as the selected
input resets
Table 10 - Lower part selection of the “C1-C6” or “C7-C12” tabs (1/4)
Selection
Display
Description
Status
By pressing the arrows, the following selections are
available for each input.
• n.a.: not applicable, the input is not
monitored
• NO: the contact is open (without voltage),
during prefault conditions; the time
measurement of that input is stopped as
soon as the contact closes (with voltage)
• NC: the contact is closed (with voltage),
during prefault conditions; the time
measurement of that input is stopped as
soon as the contact opens (without
voltage)
The following image exhibits the previous selections:

Stop Timer
By pressing the arrows, the following selections are
available:
• Trip: the timer stops as the selected input trips
• Reset: the timer awaits the input to trip; then, it
stops as the selected input resets

Table 11 - Lower part selection of the “C1-C6” or “C7-C12” tabs (2/4)


Selection
Display
Description
Debounce
This parameter refers to the filtering of trip inputs
variations that are caused by bounces of the contact.
• As the fault is injected, the timer starts counting
the delay
• If on an input it is detected a spike lasting less
than 50 µs, it is filtered away
• If on an input are detected variations lasting
more than 50 µs, bounces occurring for a
duration equal to the programmed debounce
time are ignored
• The measured time delay is stopped on the first
variation lasting more than 50 µs, so that the
debounce timing does not influence the
measured time delay
• The debounce parameter does not affect time
delay measurements, but it is important for
contact closing or opening duration and for
counting
The following image exhibits the operation performed on trip inputs:

Table 12 - Lower part selection of the “C1-C6” or “C7-C12” tabs (3/4)


Selection
Display
Description
Type
By pressing the arrows, the following selections are
available.
• Dry: there is no voltage applied; the test set will
apply a wetting voltage of –30 V with the
Interface board, and of +16 V with the
TRANSCOPE board
• With DC voltages: TTL–5 V; 24 VDC; 48 VDC;
> 110 VDC. If the voltage input is less than 70%
of the set threshold, the input will be
considered zero
Table 13 - Lower part selection of the “C1-C6” or “C7-C12” tabs (4/4)

IMPORTANT: The test set verifies the programmed trip inputs.


If no trip input is enabled, pressing OK the following message
is displayed:
“Error in setting IO: please select at least a contact”
If time measurement does not start with the injection, the test
set verifies that programmed timer start input is enabled; else,
pressing OK the following message is displayed:
“Error in setting IO: the contact selected for the timer start is
not enabled”
2.2.2 Setup/Binary I/O/Aux
The following image exhibits the “Aux” tab:

Figure 10 - "Aux" tab

The selection “NO” means that the relay does not move during the test.
To move the contact, select “NC”; after this, go to time selection and
program the delay with respect to fault parameters injection.
In the example above, contact C1 closes 10 ms after test start. The actual
delay is 6 ms longer, because of the relay close timing.
2.3 Setup/IN-
Setup/IN-3 CDG
The following image exhibits the “Setup” tab with the IN-3 CDG selection:

Figure 11 – “Setup” tab with the IN-3 CDG selection

This selection refers to the possibility to connect the IN-3 CDG option to
current outputs, so that the current displayed by the program is the one at
the output of the option: this eases the testing and the reporting
The following selections are available:
• ---- (not selected)
• 60/2.5 A
• 60/5 A
Next to the selected ratio, the test set generates the input currents
corresponding to the programmed output.

IMPORTANT: The program foresees that the 60 A at the


primary side are generated by current outputs I1 and I2 set in
parallel, so that it is possible to perform a three-phase
generations with three options. Unused inputs should be
short-circuited
2.4 Setup/Test type
The following image exhibits the “Setup” tab with the “Test Type” selection:

Figure 12 – “Setup” tab with the “Test Type” selection

The following table lists the selections of the Test Type:

Selection Chapter Display

Shot 2.4.1

Ramp 2.4.2

Delta 2.4.3

Dragging 2.4.4
Table 14 - Selections of the Test Type
2.4.1 Setup/Test type/Shot
This is the typical manual test. The user sets the prefault values, chooses the
shot type of test, goes to the Test window, programs the fault values, and
then presses the Start button: the test is started, and in the Test Results
window are shown the trip delays.
The following image exhibits the test sequence:

Figure 13 - Shot test sequence

The prefault is generated during the programmed prefault duration. After


this, fault values are generated; the fault is interrupted as the relay trips, or
as the maximum test time expires. Next, the prefault is generated during the
prefault duration. If a further test is programmed, next fault values are
generated; else, prefault values keep being generated, until the next test
start, or until the RESET button is pressed.
The operation can be repeated any time.

IMPORTANT: If more than one input is selected, the test is


stopped on the last one tripping (AND criteria)
2.4.2 Setup/Test type/Ramp
This test allows ramping up or down the desired parameters, until the relay
trips.

IMPORTANT: If more than one trip input is selected, the test is


stopped on the first one tripping (OR criteria)

The following image exhibits the icon “Set values” which appears after the
selection of the Ramp test:

Figure 14 - Ramp selection and new icon "Set values"

The following image exhibits the page opened after the selection of the icon
“Set values”:

Figure 15 - "Values" page


There are two tabs:
• V/I 1-3
• V/I 4-6
For both tabs, variables are the following:
• V/s
• A/s
• Φ/s
• Hz/s
One set for each variable.

IMPORTANT: Please, ignore the “V DC” selection

With this selection, all parameters can change with positive or negative
gradients.
In the following image, there is the programming of a ramp of 1 V/s on
outputs V1, V2 and V3:

Figure 16 - Example
Press the square on the left to enable the variable; then, write on the right
the desired rate of change.
The only impossible selection is to perform a frequency and angle gradient
simultaneously. Actually, an angle gradient involves also a frequency
gradient, and vice versa. In case of error, the selection is refused when you
start the test.
Parameter limits are as follows:
• For voltages and currents: zero, or the maximum voltages and
currents
• For angles: no limits; after 360°, the ramp continues with 0°
• For the frequency (current outputs): 0÷2,999.999 Hz
• For the frequency (voltage outputs):
o 0÷3 kHz at 0÷60 V
o Up to 2 kHz at 60÷100 V
o Up to 700 Hz at 100÷300 V
The following image exhibits the test sequence:

Figure 17 - Ramp test sequence


The ramp test is carried out by generating initially the prefault values (with
Prefault-Fault-Zero or Prefault-Fault-Prefault cycles) for the programmed
time; afterwards, fault values are generated, and selected parameters are
incremented or decremented at a constant pace, until the first one of the
selected inputs trips. At that moment the fault is removed; then, it goes to
the prefault value or to zero, according to the “cycle type” selection.
An important point about the ramp is that, as the relay trip contact is timed,
the value reached when the relay trips is something more or less than the
actual threshold. The test set holds the values at trip; then, the program
corrects for this error by taking into account the parameter “Nominal Time”.
The following image exhibits the “Nominal Time” selection in the page:

Figure 18 - "Nominal Time" selection

If it is not zero, the window will display the actual threshold by computing
the following:

      ∙  !
It is possible to see that the error to be corrected is bigger with a fast
gradient, and with a big nominal time.
The following table lists the error conditions:
No. Error conditions
When a ramp test is programmed, the test set verifies that there
is at least one parameter selected as variable; if not, as OK is
1
pressed, the following message is displayed:
“Error in setting Ramp: please select at least a parameter”
The test set verifies that, on the selected parameter, the gradient
is not zero; else, as OK is pressed, the following message is
2 displayed:
“Error in setting Ramp: the ramp value must be different than
zero”
With the Ramp test, the maximum test time parameter, Tmax
programmed in the Setup window, is important, because the
program verifies if, during this time, one or more parameters
3 exceed the limits: if so, as the test is started, the following message
is displayed:
“The ramp time has been adjusted to respect the limits. Continue
anyway?”
Pressing OK, the programmed ramp and start values are kept; the
maximum test time is modified (shortened), so that no parameter
4 exceeds the maximum. The Tmax parameter is modified for this test
only; the modified value can be read on the tests table. To avoid
this, correct the ramp or the starting value
The test set verifies that the programmed conditions are not
impossible: for instance, a positive gradient starting from the
5 maximum voltage or current; else, as the test is started, the
following message is displayed:
“Error: Ramp test has not been added. Invalid fault conditions”
The test set verifies that a frequency and angle ramp are not
selected simultaneously; else, as test start is pressed, the following
6 message is displayed:
“Error in setting Ramp: it is not possible to set phase and frequency
ramps together”
Table 15 - Error conditions
2.4.3 Setup/Test type/Delta
There are two types of relay characteristics: parameter vs. time, or
parameter vs. parameter. With the first type, each point of the curve is a
time measurement; with the second one, each point is a threshold. With the
first type of curve, it is possible to verify the characteristic curve just
performing a series of shot tests, changing the suitable parameters between
one test and the other.
This selection allows performing this test in a semi-automatic mode, by
selecting the starting parameters values, the increment of the parameters
and the number of tests to be performed. The only care is to avoid exceeding
the maximum or minimum parameter value.
The following image exhibits the icon, which appears after the selection of
the Delta test:

Figure 19 - Ramp selection and new icon "Set values"

The following image exhibits the page opened after the selection of the icon
“Set values”:

Figure 20 - "Set values" page


There are two tabs:
• V/I 1-3
• V/I 4-6
For both tabs, variables are the following:
• ΔV
• ΔA
• Δ°
• ΔHz
One set for each variable.
Using the selection “# of Steps”, the programming of the desired tests
number is possible.

IMPORTANT: Please, ignore the “V DC” selection

With this selection, all parameters can change with positive or negative
steps.
In the previous image, there is the programming of a step of 1 V on outputs
V1, V2 and V3, and 10 steps in all.
Press the square on the left to enable the variable; then, write on the right
the desired step amplitude.
Parameter limits are as follows:
• For voltages and currents: zero, or the maximum voltages and
currents
• For angles: no limits; after 360°, the test continues with 0°
• For the frequency (current outputs): 0÷2,999.999 Hz
• For the frequency (voltage outputs):
o 0÷3 kHz at 0÷60 V
o Up to 2 kHz at 60÷100 V
o Up to 700 Hz at 100÷300 V
Pressing “OK”, the test is memorized by the device.
Pressing the “START” key (F1) in the “Test” tab, in the “Status” tab it is
possible to see that the test being executed is one out of the programmed
ten tests (the first test is always the prefault generation).
The following image exhibits the “Status” tab (the grey wheel is related to
the progress of a test):

Figure 21 – “Status” tab and test in progress

All shot tests are performed one after the other; the result table will show
the test results, as many as the programmed number of Steps.

IMPORTANT: If more than one trip input is selected, the test is


stopped on the last trip (AND criteria)
The following image exhibits the parameters evolution, with selection
Prefault-Fault-Prefault (the selected parameter is
incremented/decremented by Δ; each test is a trip test; N timing results):

Figure 22 – Parameters evolution

The following table lists the error conditions:


No. Error conditions
When the delta test is programmed, the test set verifies that there
is at least one parameter selected as variable; if not, as OK is
1
pressed, the following message is displayed:
“Error in setting Delta: please select at least a parameter”
The test set verifies that, on the selected parameter, the delta is
2 not zero; else, as OK is pressed, the following message is displayed:
“Error in setting Delta: the delta value must be different than zero”
With the Delta test, the number of tests programmed is important,
because the program verifies if, during the test, one or more
parameters exceed the limits: if so, as the test is started, the
3
following message is displayed:
“The number of steps has been adjusted to respect the limits.
Continue anyway?”
Pressing OK and having the error message, there are less tests
4 than programmed. To avoid this, correct the increment or
decrement, or the first fault value, or the number of tests
The test set verifies that the programmed conditions are not
impossible: for instance, a positive delta starting from the
5 maximum voltage or current; else, as the test is started, the
following message is displayed:
“Error: Delta test has not been added. Invalid fault conditions”
Table 16 - Error conditions
2.4.4 Setup/Test type/Dragging
The instrument emulates a manual test set that injects currents and voltages
adjusted by means of the selection knob. Once performed this selection, the
Test window is modified.

IMPORTANT: See later in the Chapter 3.2 “Test/Dragging”

2.4.5 Setup/Cycle Type


The following image exhibits the “Setup” tab with the “Cycle Type”
selection:

Figure 23 – “Setup” tab with the “Cycle Type” selection


The following table lists the selections of the “Cycle Type”:

Selection Chapter Display

Fault 2.4.5.1

Pref-Fault-Zero 2.4.5.2

Pref-Fault-Pref 2.4.5.3

Fault-Zero 2.4.5.4

Fault-Prefault 2.4.5.5
Table 17 - Selections of the “Cycle Type”

2.4.5.1 Setup/Cycle Type/Fault


As the test is started, fault values are applied starting from zero (with no
prefault generation, unless the auxiliary DC voltage).
As the relay trips, fault values are removed and all parameters go to zero
(unless the auxiliary DC voltage).
If there is no further test, parameters stay at zero until the next Test Start
command.
If there is another test in an automated sequence, the zero duration before
next test is equal to the Tpf duration; then, next fault is applied.
The following image exhibits the “Fault” test sequence:

Figure 24 – “Fault” test sequence


If, in an automated test sequence, the value for Tpf is zero, then the fault
parameter will evolve from one value to the next one without passing from
zero.

IMPORTANT: In this situation the relay would not have the


time to reset, and would stay closed after the first trip.
However, this selection is useful, as it allows finding a
threshold with discrete steps rather than with a continuous
ramp

2.4.5.2 Setup/Cycle Type/Prefault-


Type/Prefault-Fault-
Fault-Zero
This test is a good simulation of what actually occurs in a plant, because after
the CB intervention all parameters go to zero. However, with this sequence,
it is important to program the prefault duration time, Tpf, different from
zero; else, the next sequence would become Fault, and some relays could
interpret the sequence as close onto fault, and behave differently from
usual.
Compared to Prefault-Fault-Prefault, when the last test is finished, all values
go to zero (unless the auxiliary DC voltage). If there is no further test,
parameters stay at zero until the next Test Start command. If there is
another test in an automated sequence, the zero duration before next test
is equal to the Tpf duration; then, the Prefault is applied for a duration equal
to Tpf, then next fault is applied.
The following image exhibits the “Prefault-Fault-Zero” test sequence:

Figure 25 – “Prefault-Fault-Zero” test sequence


2.4.5.3 Setup/Cycle Type/Prefault-
Type/Prefault-Fault-
Fault-Prefault
At test Start, prefault values are generated for the prefault time; then fault
values are generated, and they last at maximum the programmed maximum
time, Tmax. After a trip occurring within Tmax, parameters return to the pre-
fault value. If the trip does not occur within Tmax, parameters go to the pre-
fault value. All parameters remain at pre-fault value until the next test
command arrives.
The following image exhibits the “Prefault-Fault-Prefault” test sequence:

Figure 26 – “Prefault-Fault-Prefault” test sequence

2.4.5.4 Setup/Cycle Type/Fault-


Type/Fault-Zero
Same as Prefault-Fault-Zero, without prefault values: all next tests start and
return to zero.

2.4.5.5 Setup/Cycle Type/Fault-


Type/Fault-Prefault
Same as Prefault-Fault-Prefault, but without prefault values on the first test.
2.5 Setup/Times
The following image exhibits the “Setup” tab with the “Times” selection:

Figure 27 – “Setup” tab with the “Times” selection

The following table lists the parameters of the “Times” selection:

Parameter Description
It is the maximum test time. Usually it is set at a value greater the
maximum relay trip delay, so that the relay will trip within Tmax.
If the relay does not trip, test result will be a big number, such as
9,999 s. This could be the nominal result, watching contacts that
T max
should not trip during a test.
In ramp tests, Tmax defines the maximum or minimum value
reached by the parameter:
ValueMax = ValueTest + Tmax * Gradient
In the real case, fault parameters are removed by the plant after
the time taken by the CB to open the line, i.e. about 50 ms after
the relay trip. In some instance, removing the fault parameter as
CB delay soon as the relay trips has caused some malfunction, such as the
lack of the fault recording. After the relay trip, fault parameters
are maintained until the hold time expires: this simulates the CB
delay
Table 18 - Parameters of the “Times” selection
3 TEST
The following image exhibits the “Setup” tab in which it is necessary to select
a “Test Type”:

Figure 28 - "Setup" tab: select a Test type

The following image exhibits the “Test” tab in case of selection of Shot,
Ramp or Delta test (for DRTS 34):

Figure 29 - “Test” tab in case of Shot, Ramp or Delta test selection


3.1 Test/Shot, Ramp or Delta
The following table lists the selections of the “Test” tab:
Selection
Display
Description
V, A, Φ(°), f(Hz)
Voltages and currents: it is possible to
program the test value, the angle and
the frequency of each phase.
Programmed values are the following:
• Test values for the Shot selection
• The starting values for the Ramp
selection; after the first moment,
parameters programmed for
ramping start incrementing or
decrementing at the selected pace
• The first test values for the Delta
test; after the first test,
parameters programmed for
increasing or decreasing are
modified on next tests, at the
selected step
V DC
It is the voltage supply of the relay
under test; it can be programmed
from 12 V to 260 V
The V DC output cannot be
used to verify the timing of
DC voltage relays; in this
instance, use the normal
voltage output and select the
frequency equal to zero
Table 19 - Selections of the “Test” tab (1/4)
Selection
Display
Description
Vector diagram
The following image exhibits the
window opened after the selection of
this icon:

Voltages are shown with an arrow;


currents are shown with a dot. The
vectors range is the maximum voltage
or current amplitude to be generated.
The diagram above shows three
currents being 15° phase shifted with
respect to voltages
+ icon
Pressing it, all programmed values are
added to the tests list. This allows
creating a test program, that can be
executed after programming, or that
can be saved and executed later on
Trip
It displays the last trip among the
selected inputs, when the test has
stopped. The detail of all trip delays
can be read in the results table
Table 20 - Selections of the “Test” tab (2/4)
Selection
Display
Description
Table
It reports the following data: test
number, type of test, test summary,
but not the test result, that is available
in the Result selection. Lines are green
after the test has been executed, and
white before test execution.
Select the test table and press the
knob: by rotating the knob, it is
possible to reach any line, executed or
not. It is possible to delete the
selected line by pressing F5+0 (DEL)
WARNING: The line is deleted immediately, with no further
confirmation. To exit the tests, press the knob on any line
The scroll bar below the tests table
allows examining test values. Reach it,
press the knob and rotate it: all test
lines are scrolled.
For each parameter that is not zero, it
is possible to read: angle, phase,
frequency. At the end of test
parameters, the summary reports also
the maximum trip time
The button “Delete all” allows deleting
all tests of the test table. If pressed, the
following confirmation message is
displayed:

Pressing OK, results are deleted


Table 21 - selections of the “Test” tab (3/4)
Selection
Display
Description
Results
Pressing it, the following window is
displayed:

The lower part of the table reports all


the enabled trip times of the last test.
Entering the table, trip times
correspond to the selected test
Save
Pressing the “save” icon , it is possible
to access the page “Save Results” (see
Chapter 4, Paragraph 3.2)
Table 22 - Selections of the “Test” tab (4/4)

Once the parameters are set, the test evolution depends upon the type of
test, as follow:
• Shot: pressing START (F1 key), all selected parameters are
generated and applied to the relay under test. During the
generation a special icon (grey wheel), confirms the test progress.
As the relay trips, the wheel disappears and in the trip field is
displayed the elapsed time

IMPORTANT: If trip time is zero, this is because the selected


input is already in the trip condition. Please, verify and correct

IMPORTANT: If there is no trip during the selected maximum


test time, the trip result is “----“. Please, check and correct
• Ramp: pressing START (F1 key), all selected parameters are
generated and applied to the relay under test and then selected
parameters ramp up or down according to the selection, but the
displayed values are not changed until the relay trips. During the
generation a special icon (grey wheel), confirms the test progress.
As the relay trips, the wheel disappears and in the trip field is
displayed the elapsed time

IMPORTANT: If the result equals the stating values, this is


because the selected input is already in the trip condition.
Please, verify and correct
IMPORTANT: When the test is finished, please verify that the
Trip Delay is different from “----“. In this instance, the
displayed values are those reached as the maximum time is
elapsed, but they are not the relay threshold. Please, check
and correct

• Delta: pressing START (F1 key), all selected parameters are


generated and applied to the relay under test. During the
generation a special icon (grey wheel), confirms the test progress.
As the relay trips, the wheel disappears and in the trip field the
elapsed time is displayed. At this point, the selected parameters are
incremented/decremented by the selected amount. The test
counter is incremented and the new test is performed. At the end
the test table lists all test performed

IMPORTANT: If trip time is zero, this is because the selected


input is already in the trip condition. Please, verify and correct

IMPORTANT: If there is no trip during the selected maximum


test time, the trip result is “----“. Please, check and correct
3.2 Test/Dragging
With this selection, the instrument emulates a manual test set that injects
currents and voltages adjusted by means of the selection knob, with the
purpose of finding the relay threshold. With this test trip times are not
measured, but it is reported when an enabled input trips.
The following image exhibits the page opened after the selection of
Test/Dragging:

Figure 30 - "Dragging" page


The following table lists the selections of the “Dragging” page:
Selection
Display
Description
V, A, Φ(°), f(Hz)
Voltages and currents: it is possible to
program the start-up parameters:
• Voltage
• Current
• Frequency
of each phase (see Paragraph 3.1)
V DC
It is the voltage supply of the relay
under test; it can be programmed
from 12 V to 260 V (see Paragraph 3.1)

Contacts
There are 12 lights. At any moment
after the dragging test is selected, if
one of the inputs trips, the
corresponding light turns on (green)

Vector diagram
Vector form of the outputs (see
Paragraph 3.1)

Table 23 - Selections of the “Dragging” page


The following table lists the operations to perform the Dragging test:

Step Description
Enter the parameters to control, and press Start: all the
1
selected parameters are generated
Reach for the parameter to control and press the knob to select
it. Rotate clockwise (counter-clockwise) the knob:
• the value increments (decrements)
• the variation is displayed on the vector diagram
In alternative, push the right or left arrow and the parameter
decreases or increases by one tenth; pushing shift plus the
knob, the parameter decreases or increases by ten times

IMPORTANT: Increments from the knob are:


2 • 0.1 V
• 1°
• 0.1 Hz
• 0.1 A
• 0.1 V DC
IMPORTANT: The amount of increments can be
changed by entering the toothed wheel and then
Software tools
IMPORTANT: After START, you cannot modify the
values via the keyboard

It is possible to modify all desired values.


As soon as the relay trips, one of the lights to the left turns on:
the corresponding value is the threshold desired
3
IMPORTANT: Being a manual test, the result is not
saved in the results table
Table 24 - Operations to perform the Dragging test (1/2)
Step Description

In case it is necessary to modify at the meanwhile the value of a


number of parameters, select the first parameter, press F5+F4
(SEL): the background of the parameter turns to red.

4 Enter any of the parameters and press Start: turning the knob,
all selected parameters are modified at the meanwhile. In the
example, the three currents I1, I2, I3 have been programmed to
be modified together. It is also possible to rotate the three
outputs altogether, or to change the frequency
IMPORTANT: It is possible to select together only
parameters of the same type, such as: voltage
(current) amplitude, voltage (current) phase, voltage
(current) frequency

To remove the selections, go to the parameters and press again


5 F5+F4: the parameter returns to white. Changing the selected
type, other selections are reset
Table 25 - Operations to perform the Dragging test (2/2)
4 STATUS
Purpose of this selection is to watch the test set operation during long tests,
i.e. tests where parameters do not change too fast. The window is
automatically opened when a ramp or delta test are started, and it is closed
as soon as the test is finished. It is also possible to select it any time, to see
the status of the outputs and of the trip inputs; however, this does not apply
to the Dragging selection.
This selection is used to test a transducer: connect its inputs to the V, I
outputs, and its output to the Measure input, either DC current or DC
voltage.
The following image exhibits the “Status” tab:

Figure 31 - "Status" tab


The following table lists the elements of the “Status” page:
Selection
Display
Description

Parameters
The display shows all parameters
being currently generated

Contacts
A light (green) on C1÷C12 means that
the corresponding contact has tripped
Contacts
When a contact A1÷A8 has closed, the
corresponding box turns on (green)
Analog Inputs
It is possible to disable or enable the
measurement, by clicking the knob on
it. It is possible to select if the
measurement is on current or voltage
input, by clicking the knob on it: the
corresponding measurement, in V or
mA, is shown to the right. Testing a
transformer, it is possible to verify if it
is right. This is performed pressing the
START button: parameters will be
generated and measurements
displayed
Table 26 - Elements of the “Status” page

To change parameters, stop the test, go to the Test window, change the
parameters, go to the Status window and start again. No parameters change
can be performed while being in the Status window.
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1 – “MANUAL CONTROL” HOME PAGE ................................................... 227
FIGURE 2 – “SETUP” PAGE .............................................................................. 228
FIGURE 3 - "PREFAULT" PAGE .......................................................................... 230
FIGURE 4 - "AUXILIARY" PAGE .......................................................................... 233
FIGURE 5 - RELAY OUTPUTS (4) A1÷A4 ............................................................. 233
FIGURE 6 –ROUND CONNECTOR (26) WITH SOLID STATE OUTPUTS A5÷A8 ............... 234
FIGURE 7 - "AUXILIARY" TAB: RELAY OUTPUTS AND THE SOLID-STATE OUTPUTS .......... 234
FIGURE 8 - "FAULT I/O SETTINGS" PAGE ............................................................ 237
FIGURE 9 - “CIRCUIT BREAKER” PAGE ................................................................ 239
FIGURE 10 - "AUX" TAB .................................................................................. 243
FIGURE 11 – “SETUP” TAB WITH THE IN-3 CDG SELECTION .................................. 244
FIGURE 12 – “SETUP” TAB WITH THE “TEST TYPE” SELECTION ................................ 245
FIGURE 13 - SHOT TEST SEQUENCE .................................................................... 246
FIGURE 14 - RAMP SELECTION AND NEW ICON "SET VALUES" ................................. 247
FIGURE 15 - "VALUES" PAGE ........................................................................... 247
FIGURE 16 - EXAMPLE .................................................................................... 248
FIGURE 17 - RAMP TEST SEQUENCE ................................................................... 249
FIGURE 18 - "NOMINAL TIME" SELECTION.......................................................... 250
FIGURE 19 - RAMP SELECTION AND NEW ICON "SET VALUES" ................................. 252
FIGURE 20 - "SET VALUES" PAGE ...................................................................... 252
FIGURE 21 – “STATUS” TAB AND TEST IN PROGRESS ............................................. 254
FIGURE 22 – PARAMETERS EVOLUTION .............................................................. 255
FIGURE 23 – “SETUP” TAB WITH THE “CYCLE TYPE” SELECTION .............................. 256
FIGURE 24 – “FAULT” TEST SEQUENCE .............................................................. 257
FIGURE 25 – “PREFAULT-FAULT-ZERO” TEST SEQUENCE ....................................... 258
FIGURE 26 – “PREFAULT-FAULT-PREFAULT” TEST SEQUENCE ................................. 259
FIGURE 27 – “SETUP” TAB WITH THE “TIMES” SELECTION ..................................... 260
FIGURE 28 - "SETUP" TAB: SELECT A TEST TYPE ................................................... 261
FIGURE 29 - “TEST” TAB IN CASE OF SHOT, RAMP OR DELTA TEST SELECTION ............ 261
FIGURE 30 - "DRAGGING" PAGE ....................................................................... 267
FIGURE 31 - "STATUS" TAB ............................................................................. 271
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE 1 - TABS OF THE “MANUAL CONTROL” HOME PAGE .................................... 227
TABLE 2 - SELECTIONS OF THE “SETUP” PAGE (1/2) ............................................. 228
TABLE 3 - SELECTIONS OF THE “SETUP” PAGE (1/2) ............................................. 229
TABLE 4 - TABS OF THE “PREFAULT” PAGE .......................................................... 230
TABLE 5 - ELECTIONS OF THE “VALUES” TAB (1/2) ............................................... 231
TABLE 6 - SELECTIONS OF THE “VALUES” TAB (2/2) ............................................. 232
TABLE 7 - SELECTIONS OF THE LOWER PART OF THE “AUXILIARY” TAB (1/2) .............. 235
TABLE 8 - SELECTIONS OF THE LOWER PART OF THE “AUXILIARY” TAB (2/2) .............. 236
TABLE 9 - TABS OF THE “FAULT I/O SETTINGS” PAGE............................................ 237
TABLE 10 - LOWER PART SELECTION OF THE “C1-C6” OR “C7-C12” TABS (1/4)....... 239
TABLE 11 - LOWER PART SELECTION OF THE “C1-C6” OR “C7-C12” TABS (2/4)....... 240
TABLE 12 - LOWER PART SELECTION OF THE “C1-C6” OR “C7-C12” TABS (3/4)....... 241
TABLE 13 - LOWER PART SELECTION OF THE “C1-C6” OR “C7-C12” TABS (4/4)....... 242
TABLE 14 - SELECTIONS OF THE TEST TYPE.......................................................... 245
TABLE 15 - ERROR CONDITIONS ........................................................................ 251
TABLE 16 - ERROR CONDITIONS ........................................................................ 255
TABLE 17 - SELECTIONS OF THE “CYCLE TYPE”..................................................... 257
TABLE 18 - PARAMETERS OF THE “TIMES” SELECTION ........................................... 260
TABLE 19 - SELECTIONS OF THE “TEST” TAB (1/4) ............................................... 262
TABLE 20 - SELECTIONS OF THE “TEST” TAB (2/4) ............................................... 263
TABLE 21 - SELECTIONS OF THE “TEST” TAB (3/4)................................................ 264
TABLE 22 - SELECTIONS OF THE “TEST” TAB (4/4) ............................................... 265
TABLE 23 - SELECTIONS OF THE “DRAGGING” PAGE.............................................. 268
TABLE 24 - OPERATIONS TO PERFORM THE DRAGGING TEST (1/2) .......................... 269
TABLE 25 - OPERATIONS TO PERFORM THE DRAGGING TEST (2/2) .......................... 270
TABLE 26 - ELEMENTS OF THE “STATUS” PAGE .................................................... 272
DRTS XX FAMILY
Chapter
CHAPTER 6 – LOCAL CONTROL: DISTANCE6ANSI 21

LOCAL CONTROL:
DISTANCE ANSI 21

DOCUMENT No. MIE10170, Rev. 1.33, March 2015


TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 6 – LOCAL CONTROL: DISTANCE ANSI 21 ............................... 275
1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................. 279
2 SETUP ............................................................................................ 280
SETUP/GENERATE PREFAULT AND APPLY V DC ..................................... 282
SETUP/BINARY INPUTS ..................................................................... 283
SETUP/NOMINAL VALUES ................................................................. 285
2.3.1 Setup/Nominal Values/Vn (V) ............................................. 285
2.3.2 Setup/Nominal Values/I test (A) .......................................... 286
2.3.3 Setup/Nominal Values/Fn (Hz) ............................................ 287
2.3.4 Setup/Nominal Values/V DC (V) .......................................... 287
SETUP/CT SIDE ............................................................................... 288
SETUP/KE GIVEN AS AND ZLOOP/ARC RES ........................................... 289
SETUP/NOMINAL TIMES ................................................................... 291
SETUP/SWITCH ............................................................................... 292
3 TEST ............................................................................................... 293
TEST/SHOT .................................................................................... 295
3.1.1 Test/Shot/Fault Values ........................................................ 296
3.1.2 Test/Shot/Timer Settings..................................................... 297
3.1.3 Test/Shot/Fault Type ........................................................... 298
3.1.4 Test/Shot/Table ................................................................... 300
TEST/AUTO Z-T .............................................................................. 303
3.2.1 Test/Auto Z-t/Fault Values .................................................. 305
3.2.2 Test/Auto Z-t/Timer Settings ............................................... 308
3.2.3 Test/Auto Z-t/Fault Type ..................................................... 308
3.2.4 Test/Auto Z-t/Table ............................................................. 308
TEST/BORDER................................................................................. 309
3.3.1 Test/Border/Impedance Settings ........................................ 310
3.3.2 Test/Border/Timer Settings ................................................. 311
3.3.3 Test/Border/Fault Type ....................................................... 311
3.3.4 Test/Border/Table ............................................................... 311
4 GRAPH ........................................................................................... 312
5 STATUS .......................................................................................... 313
6 RESULTS ......................................................................................... 314
1 INTRODUCTION
Purpose of this selection is to perform the manual and automatic test of
distance relays. Unlike the manual selection, input parameters are
impedance and its argument rather than voltage and current.
The following image exhibits the Home page of the “Distance ANSI 21”
selection:

Figure 1 – “Distance ANSI 21” Home page

The following table lists the tabs of the “Distance ANSI 21” Home page:
Tab Paragraph Display

Setup 2

Test 3

Graph 4

Status 5
Table 1 – Tabs of “Distance ANSI 21” Home page
2 SETUP
The following image exhibits the “Setup” tab:

Figure 2 – “Setup” tab

The following table lists the selections of the “Setup” tab:


Selection Paragraph Display
Generate
Prefault
2.1
Apply V DC
Binary
2.2
Inputs

Nominal
2.3
Values

CT Side 2.4
Table 2 - Selections of the “Setup” tab (1/2)
Selection Paragraph Display

KE given as
ZLoop/Arc 2.5
Res

Nominal
2.6
Times

Switch 2.7
Table 3 - Selections of the “Setup” tab (2/2)

CAUTION: For all the not listed parameters in the Table 2 and
Table 3, please, refer to Chapter 4 “Local Control”
Setup/Generate Prefault and Apply V DC
The following image exhibits the two commands “Generate Prefault” and
“Apply V DC”:

Figure 3 - "Generate Prefault" and "Apply V DC" commands

With these commands, the test set generates the prefault voltages and the
auxiliary DC voltage, or the auxiliary DC voltage only. Before giving the
command, it is necessary to program these values in the Nominal values
selection.
Setup/Binary Inputs
The following image exhibits the selection “Binary Inputs”:

Figure 4 - "Binary Inputs" selection

This selection allows defining the trip inputs that are used during the tests,
and to associate them to the type of fault.
The following image exhibits the “Binary Inputs” page:

Figure 5 - "Binary inputs" page


The following table lists the elements of the “Binary Inputs” page:
Selection
Display
Description
Setup Digital Inputs
By pressing the arrows, the following
selections are available:
• Dry: there is no voltage applied; the
test set will apply a wetting voltage
of -30 V with the Interface board,
and of +16 V with the TRANSCOPE
board
• With DC voltages: TTL–5 V; 24 VDC;
48 VDC; > 110 VDC. If the voltage
input is less than 70% of the set
threshold, the input will be
considered zero
Trip Mode
It is possible to associate the type of fault
to the corresponding trip input. By
pressing the arrows, choose any input,
from C1 to C12 (C1÷C6; C9÷C12 with the
TRANSCOPE option): they are selected as
Normal Open.
For Phase-to-Phase faults, selected
inputs are those of the single-phase fault:
L1 for L1-L2, and so on.
For three phase faults, choose any input,
from C1 to C12: they are selected as
Normal Open
Table 4 - Elements of the “Binary Inputs” page
Setup/Nominal Values
The following image exhibits the selection “Nominal Values”:

Figure 6 - "Nominal Values" selection

This selection allows defining the nominal values that are used during tests.

2.3.1 Setup/Nominal Values/Vn (V)


It is the secondary side nominal phase voltage of the voltage transformers
of the plant, named also healthy voltage, at which the distance relay does
not see any fault. It can be selected between 1 V and maximum voltage of
the instrument.
The default value is the following: 57.8 V.
If the relay load is high, as the impedance is V/I, it is possible to reduce both
to a lower value (for instance, 40V), at no relevant degradation of the relay
accuracy: reducing the current increases the maximum burden that can be
driven by the instrument.
CAUTION: During ground fault tests, the (phase) fault voltage
is less than Vnom; during phase to phase faults, it remains above
 ⁄2
CAUTION: The parameter to be programmed is the phase
voltage, and not the phase-to-phase nominal voltage, that is
usually reported on the distance relay. With the phase to
phase voltage of 100 V, program 57.8 V; with the phase to
phase voltage of 110 V, program 63.5 V

2.3.2 Setup/Nominal Values/I test (A)


It is the test current (and not the nominal relay current); it is used during all
tests.
The default value is the following: 7.5 A (that is usually used for relays with
a nominal current of 5 A).
When the nominal current is 1 A, the usual test current is 1.5 A.
The maximum test current is 32 A.
The test current is kept constant, unless the corresponding test voltage
exceeds the nominal phase voltage, given the fault impedance that has been
programmed (see Appendix VI for further details). In this situation, the test
current is reduced so that the fault impedance can be tested.
During tests, the test set controls the zero crossing of the current. Faults are
generated as follows:
• With single phase tests, the faulty current is applied when the
current is at the zero crossing
• With phase to phase tests, both faulty currents are applied
when they are at the zero crossing
• With three phase tests, the phases are the following:
• Phase 1 faulty current is applied when the current is
at the zero crossing
• Phase 2 current is applied at 240°
• Phase 3 current is applied at 120°
2.3.3 Setup/Nominal Values/Fn (Hz)
It is possible to program any frequency value between 40 and 70 Hz.
The default value is the following: 50 Hz.

2.3.4 Setup/Nominal Values/V DC (V)


It is the auxiliary DC voltage used to power up the relay under test.
Range 12÷260 V.
The default value is the following: 110 V.
Setup/CT Side
The following image exhibits the selection “CT Side”:

Figure 7 - "CT Side" selection

This selection allows defining the side to which the secondary of the CT is
grounded.
Available selections are the following:
• Line: current angles are the ones selected for tests
• Busbar: angles are rotated by 180°, but this angle change is not
reported in test results, that look like those obtained with the Line
selection
Setup/KE given as and ZLoop/Arc Res
The following table lists the elements of the “KE given as” and “ZLoop/Arc
Res” tabs:
Selection
Display
Description
KE given as
This section allows programming the earth factor as KE.
This parameter is applied to all zones.
The parameter can be given two ways:
• ZE/ZL
• RE/RL and XE/XL (used by SIEMENS)
When selecting ZE/ZL, it is possible to input the module
of the parameter (default 1) and its argument
(default 0°)
According to the relay manufacturer or the user, the same factor can be expressed with
other parameters, that are mathematically related by the following formulas:
• The base for the computation of other parameters are the line impedance parameters,
i.e. the parameters of the line to be protected. This is not to be confused with the fault
impedance. These parameters can be given as module ZL and argument ΦL, or with
the related components RL and XL, where:
• RL = ZL * cos (φL)
• XL = ZL * sin (φL)
• The first related parameter is the zero sequence impedance Z0, given as module and
argument. With these parameters, you can compute the corresponding earth factor
KE and its argument as follows:
• KE = (1/3) * (Z0-ZL)/ZL
• φE = φ0 -φL
• The second related parameter is the ground impedance ZN, given as module and
argument. With these parameters, you can compute the corresponding earth factor
KE and its argument as follows:
• KE = ZN/ZL
• φE = φN - φL
• The third related parameter is the loop impedance Zlo, given as module and argument.
With these parameters, you can compute the corresponding earth factor KE and its
argument as follows:
• KE = (Zlo – ZL)/ZL
• φE = φlo – φL
If the input data are RE/RL and XE/XL, the program uses the parameters with the following:
R’ = R * (1 + RE/RL)
X’ = X * (1 + XE/XL)
Z =  ′ ′ 
φZ= tan R’/X’
V1 = Z * Itest
Table 5 - Elements of the “KE given as” and “ZLoop/Arc Res” tabs (1/2)
Selection
Display
Description
ZLoop/Arc Res
This section allows programming the Zloop
earth factor (or the arc resistance) on the
desired type of fault. The programming area
is the following one:
• LN
• LLL
• LL
Some distance relays define the parameters
X as fault impedances, and the parameters R
as loop impedances; furthermore, the Rloop
definition can be applied or not to ground
faults or to phase to phase faults. If one of
these protections have to be tested, this
window allows selecting the relative option:
the program will transform the nominal loop
values into the corresponding line values and
the vice-versa.
Please refer to Appendix IV for the formulas
used in these instances
Table 6 - Elements of the “KE given as” and “ZLoop/Arc Res” tabs (2/2)
Setup/Nominal Times
The following image exhibits the selection “Nominal Times”:

Figure 8 - "Nominal Times" selection

This section allows programming the nominal relay trip times for the
different zones.
Trip times are defined for each zone, and are the same for all types of fault.
Nominal times are used to verify the relay settings (see the relative
paragraph).
It is very important that actual trip times correspond to the programmed
ones.

CAUTION: If the nominal times differ from the actual values by


more than 30%, in the Border test, the program will not be
able to find the zone limits

The time “t1o” refers to the first zone over-reach condition.


Setup/Switch
The following image exhibits the selection “Switch”:

Figure 9 - "Switch" selection

During the test, it is possible to close a contact prior to the test itself. If this
contact is connected to a digital input of the relay, such as the over-reach
command, it is possible to verify that the relay changes its first zone limit.
With the arrows of the “Switch” selection, it is possible to select the output
that will switch.
3 TEST
The following image exhibits the “Test” tab:

Figure 10 - "Test" tab

The following table lists the selections of the “Test” tab:


Selection Paragraph Display

Shot 3.1

Auto Z-t 3.2

Border 3.3
Table 7 - Tabs of the “Test” page

For all these tests, faults are simulated considering the Setup values, that
have to be programmed first.
Appendix VI summarizes the fault calculation formulas, and the vector
diagrams of the different types of fault.
CAUTION: The zone limit cannot be defined by one test. It is
defined by two tests, where:
• in test N there are the test impedance Z(N), and a trip time
of zone N
• and test N+1, the test impedance is Z(N+1) and the trip
time is t(N+1)
In this situation, the zone limit is the following:
Zl = (Z(N) + Z(N+1))/2
and the test result accuracy is the following:
Za = ± (Z(N+1) – Z(N))/2
In fact, it is not possible to know where the zone is changed
between Z(N) and Z(N+1): it could be anywhere.
Therefore, the smaller the difference between the two tests
the higher the test result accuracy.
Test/Shot
The shot test allows programming any type of fault and any fault impedance.
Then a fault is generated with the programmed values, and the
corresponding trip delay is displayed.
The following image exhibits the “Shot” page:

Figure 11 - "Shot" page

CAUTION: The angle in the R-X diagram has an opposite sign


with respect to the angle between current and voltage. This is
because computing Z = V/I, the current is at the denominator.
As the burden is inductive, the current has a negative angle,
but the impedance has a positive angle
The following table lists the elements of the “Shot” page:
Element Paragraph Display

Fault Values 3.1.1

Timer Settings 3.1.2

Measure trip
trip
delay
Fault Type 3.1.3

Table 3.1.4

Table 8 - Elements of the “Shot” page

3.1.1 Test/Shot/Fault Values


The Fault Values are related to the fault impedance, which can be
programmed as follow:
• As impedance (Z) and argument (φ)
• As R and X components
As soon as a parameter is modified, the others are modified accordingly, as
they are mathematically related.
Using the button “+”, it is possible to add the programmed value to the list
of tests that is being created at the bottom of the screen.
The following image exhibits the Table with Shot tests programmed:

Figure 12 - Table with Shot tests programmed


By this feature, it is possible to program an endless number of tests, without
actually starting them. Finishing with the programming, start the test
session by pressing the START key, F1: all tests are performed, one after the
other, and the corresponding test results are displayed. Otherwise, select
Result, and then save the program as a result (Ref. to Chapter 4.3).

3.1.2 Test/Shot/Timer Settings


The following table lists the “Timer Settings” selections:
Selection
Display
Description
t Pre
It is the prefault duration before the fault is applied.
When a sequence of tests is programmed, two tests
can be executed immediately one after the other.
The relay cannot have the time to reset, creating a
lockout situation. Therefore, it is necessary to
program the prefault duration, which should not be
zero: the default is 0.1 s.
The following diagram exhibits the
Prefault/Fault/Prefault cycle:

t Max
It is the maximum test time; if there is no trip within
t Max, the test result is “----“
Table 9 - “Timer Settings” selections (1/2)
Selection
Display
Description
CB Delay
In the real case, fault parameters are removed from
the relay after the time taken by the CB to open the
line, i.e. about 50 ms after the relay trip. In some
instance, removing the fault parameter as soon as
the relay trip has caused some malfunction, such as
the lack of the fault recording. After the relay trip,
fault parameters are maintained until the CB delay
expires
Table 10 - “Timer Settings” selections (2/2)

3.1.3 Test/Shot/Fault Type


For the “Fault Type”, it is possible to select two different parameters:
• The fault evolution, between PFP (Prefault-Fault-Prefault) and PF0
(Prefault-Fault-Zero)
• The phase faults, among L1, L2 or L3 (single phase), L12, L21 or L31
(phase to phase), or L123 (three phase)
The following table lists the “Fault Type” parameters for the fault evolution:
Selection
Description
PFP
At test Start, prefault values are generated for the prefault time; then fault
values are generated, and they last at maximum the programmed maximum
time, Tmax. After a trip occurring within Tmax, parameters return to the pre-fault
value. If the trip does not occur within Tmax, parameters go to the pre-fault
value. All parameters remain at pre-fault value until the next test command
arrives.
The following image exhibits the Prefault-Fault-Prefault test sequence:

PF0
This test is a good simulation of what actually occurs in a plant, because after
the CB intervention all parameters go to zero. However, with this sequence, it is
important to program the prefault duration time, Tpf, different from zero; else,
the next sequence would become Fault, and some relays could interpret the
sequence as close onto fault, and behave differently from usual.
Compared to Prefault-Fault-Prefault, when the last test is finished, all values go
to zero (unless the auxiliary DC voltage). If there is no further test, parameters
stay at zero until the next Test Start command. If there is another test in an
automated sequence, the zero duration before next test is equal to the Tpf
duration; then, the Prefault is applied for a duration equal to Tpf, then next fault
is applied.
The following image exhibits the Prefault-Fault-Zero test sequence:

Table 11 - Fault Type” parameters for the fault evolution


3.1.4 Test/Shot/Table
est/Shot/Table
The following image exhibits the Programming Table, after a test
programming:

Figure 13 – Table: Shot, Auto Z-t and Border tests

The table reports the following elements:


• # (test number)
• Test (test type)
• Test Summary (fault values)
The test result is not in the table, because it is shown as a trip for the last
test, and it is available in the Results selection.
The following button exhibits the trip for the last test:

Figure 14 - Trip for the last test

Lines of the Table are green after the test has been executed, and white
before test execution.
Select the Table and press the knob: by rotating the knob, it is possible to
reach any line, executed or not.
It is possible to delete the selected line by pressing F5+0 (DEL).

CAUTION: The line is deleted immediately, with no further


confirmation

To exit the tests, press the knob on any line.


The scroll bar below the tests table allows examining test values. Reach it,
press the knob and rotate it: all test lines are scrolled.
The following image exhibits the scroll bar:

Figure 15 - Scroll bar

For each parameter that is not zero, it is possible to read the following:
impedance, angle, and the R, X components.
The button “Delete all” allows deleting all tests of the test table. If pressed,
the following confirmation message is displayed:

Figure 16 - Confirmation message to delete

Pressing OK, results are deleted.


Test/Auto Z-
Z-t
Purpose of this test is to find the zone limits at a given fault angle and with
a given fault type. It is quite normal to consider the (R, X) representation of
the distance relay characteristic. Each of the lines sets the limit between
adjacent zones, which have different trip delays. At a given angle, it is
possible to draw the Z- t diagram, that corresponds to a line drawn on the
(R, X) plane.
The following image exhibits three elements:
• a typical distance relay characteristic curve on the (R, X) plane
• a line drawn at some angle
• the corresponding intersection points

Figure 17 – (R, X) plane


The following image exhibits the intersection line in the (Z, t) plane:

Figure 18 – (Z, t) plane

Zones trip times are T1, T2, T3, and T4; after the last zone, the relay does
not trip. Zones limits are Z1, Z2, Z3, and Z4.
The following image exhibits the “Auto Z-t” tab:

Figure 19 - "Auto Z-t" tab


The following table lists the elements of the “Auto Z-t” page:
Element Paragraph Display

Fault Values 3.2.1

Timer Settings 3.2.2

Fault Type 3.2.3

Table 3.2.4

Table 12 - Elements of the “Shot” page

3.2.1 Test/Auto Z-
Z-t/Fault Values
The following image exhibits the Fault Values:

Figure 20 - Fault Values

The Fault Values are the following:


• Start (Ω): it is the impedance value of the first test
• Step (Ω): it is the impedance increment between tests
• Stop (Ω): it is the impedance value of the last test
• φ(°): it is the angle at which tests will be performed
The Auto Z-t test can be used for two purposes.
The first purpose is to have a course idea of zone limits setting and to
measure the actual trip times of the different zones. For this purpose, it is
possible to program large impedance steps: zone limits is found with a
coarse resolution.
The following image exhibits the test result:

Figure 21 - First purpose: test result

CAUTION: The blank dots correspond to no trip results: they


are necessary to verify the Z4 setting

The second purpose is to measure accurately a zone limit. For this purpose,
the start and stop impedances will be close to the nominal value, a little
smaller and bigger respectively; the step will be as small as desired, based
upon the test result accuracy.
The following image exhibits the test result:

Figure 22 - Second purpose: test result

The example is related to the Z1 test. Dots are much closer, and define
exactly the Z1 limit.

Assume the following:


Step impedance = Zs
Last test where the relay tripped in zone 1 = ZN
First test where the relay tripped in zone 2 = ZN+1
Result:
Z1 = (ZN + ZN+1)/2
Result accuracy = ± Zs/2
3.2.2 Test/Auto Z-
Z-t/Timer Settings
Please, refer to Paragraph 3.1.2.

3.2.3 Test/Auto Z-
Z-t/Fault Type
Please, refer to Paragraph 3.1.3.

3.2.4 Test/Auto
Test/Auto Z-
Z-t/Table
Please, refer to Paragraph 3.1.4.
Test/Border
This selection allows performing the test very common: having a setting
table, the task is to verify that the settings are the correct ones.
To this purpose, the program performs an automatic test: starting from the
setting values, it tests the relay response injecting faults equal to the set
zone limits, plus and minus the set tolerance. The program tells also whether
the trip time is correct or not.
The following image exhibits the “Border” tab:

Figure 23 - "Border" tab

The following table lists the elements of the “Border” tab:


Element Paragraph Display

Impedance
3.3.1
Settings

Timer
3.3.2
Settings
Table 13 - Elements of the “Border” tab (1/2)
Element Paragraph Display
Fault
3.3.3
Type

Table 3.3.4

Table 14 - Elements of the “Border” tab (1/2)

3.3.1 Test/Border
Test/Border/Impedance
Border/Impedance Settings
The following image exhibits the “Impedance Settings”:

Figure 24 – “Impedance settings”

The following table lists the elements of the “Impedance Settings”:


Element Description
On the first line it is possible to select the zone limits to
test. The Z1o selection refers to the first zone over-reach. It
is possible to select this test after having selected the
1
Switch in the Setup window: prior to test the Z1o setting,
the program closes the selected auxiliary output, that is
connected to the relay Overreach input
On the second line the nominal trip times of the different
2 zones are programmed
Table 15 - Elements of the “Impedance Settings” (1/2)
Element Description
On the third line, it is possible to program the test angle. If
the setting table has more than one setting, for instance
with values at 80°, at 90° and at 0°, it is necessary to input
3 three times the setting values at the corresponding angles.
Between one angle selection and the next one it is necessary
to press the green button “+”: settings are added to the test
summary
It is necessary to program the Tolerance: tests is performed
4 at the tolerance limits
Table 16 - Elements of the “Impedance Settings” (2/2)

3.3.2 Test/Border/Timer Settings


Please, refer to Paragraph 3.1.2.

3.3.3 Test/Border/Fault Type


Please, refer to Paragraph 3.1.3.

3.3.4 Test/Border
Test/Border/
Border/Table
Please, refer to Paragraph 3.1.4.
4 GRAPH
The following image exhibits the “Graph” tab:

Figure 25 - "Graph" tab

The selection displays the test result in the (Z, t) plane.


In the graph, it is possible to zoom on and off the display as follows:
• Select Z1: this is the left zoom limit. Move the cursor at will (on the
Z axis)
• Select Z2: this is the right zoom limit. Move the cursor at will
• Press zoom in: the diagram within the cursors is zoomed
• In a similar way, the zoom can be performed also on the t axis, by
selecting t1 (lower limit) and t2 (upper limit), and then zooming in
and out
• It is possible also to set both limits simultaneously: the area
included within limits is zoomed in and out
5 STATUS
Purpose of this selection is to watch the test set operation during long tests,
i.e. tests where parameters do not change too fast. The window is
automatically accessed as soon as starting a Z-t or verify test.
The following image exhibits the “Status” tab:

Figure 26 - "Status" tab

The following table lists the elements of the “Status” tab:


Element Description
Upper side: the display shows all parameters being currently
1
generated
C1÷C12 line: lights on mean that the corresponding contact
2
has tripped
3 V DC: auxiliary DC voltage supply

4 Trip: last test trip delay


Yellow area: during test evolution, it is shown the number of
5
the test in progress
Last line: during the test evolution, type of test, fault
6
impedance and fault argument are shown
Table 17 - Elements of the “Status” tab
6 RESULTS
The following image exhibits the “Results” tab:

Figure 27 - "Results" tab

Press the button and enter the results table; move the knob and scroll
results. The horizontal scroll bar below allows reading more about the tests
data. As you scroll results, in the bottom part of the page, all parameters are
displayed.
The following table lists the elements of the “Results” tab:
Selection
Display
Description
Fault
Type of fault (i.e. single phase L1)
Fault impedance
Value of the fault impedance Z (i.e. 0.190 Ohm)
Fault angle
Value of the fault angle Φ (i.e. 80.0°)
Table 18 - Elements of the “Results” tab (1/2)
Selection
Display
Description
Nom
Value of the Nominal impedance in the
Border test (i.e. 0.200 ± 0.010 Ohm)
t
Value of the trip delay (i.e. 0.0788 s)
Err
It is the difference in Ohm between the
measured impedance
Result
Only for the Border test.
Green check = test result correct
White cross on a red spot = wrong trip
relay
Table 19 - Elements of the “Results” tab (2/2)
Page left intentionally blank.
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1 – “DISTANCE ANSI 21” HOME PAGE ................................................... 279
FIGURE 2 – “SETUP” TAB ................................................................................ 280
FIGURE 3 - "GENERATE PREFAULT" AND "APPLY V DC" COMMANDS....................... 282
FIGURE 4 - "BINARY INPUTS" SELECTION ............................................................ 283
FIGURE 5 - "BINARY INPUTS" PAGE ................................................................... 283
FIGURE 6 - "NOMINAL VALUES" SELECTION ........................................................ 285
FIGURE 7 - "CT SIDE" SELECTION ...................................................................... 288
FIGURE 8 - "NOMINAL TIMES" SELECTION .......................................................... 291
FIGURE 9 - "SWITCH" SELECTION ...................................................................... 292
FIGURE 10 - "TEST" TAB ................................................................................. 293
FIGURE 11 - "SHOT" PAGE .............................................................................. 295
FIGURE 12 - TABLE WITH SHOT TESTS PROGRAMMED ........................................... 296
FIGURE 13 – TABLE: SHOT, AUTO Z-T AND BORDER TESTS..................................... 300
FIGURE 14 - TRIP FOR THE LAST TEST ................................................................. 301
FIGURE 15 - SCROLL BAR ................................................................................. 301
FIGURE 16 - CONFIRMATION MESSAGE TO DELETE................................................ 302
FIGURE 17 – (R, X) PLANE .............................................................................. 303
FIGURE 18 – (Z, T) PLANE ............................................................................... 304
FIGURE 19 - "AUTO Z-T" TAB .......................................................................... 304
FIGURE 20 - FAULT VALUES ............................................................................. 305
FIGURE 21 - FIRST PURPOSE: TEST RESULT .......................................................... 306
FIGURE 22 - SECOND PURPOSE: TEST RESULT ...................................................... 307
FIGURE 23 - "BORDER" TAB ............................................................................ 309
FIGURE 24 – “IMPEDANCE SETTINGS” ............................................................... 310
FIGURE 25 - "GRAPH" TAB .............................................................................. 312
FIGURE 26 - "STATUS" TAB ............................................................................. 313
FIGURE 27 - "RESULTS" TAB ............................................................................ 314
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE 1 – TABS OF “DISTANCE ANSI 21” HOME PAGE ........................................ 279
TABLE 2 - SELECTIONS OF THE “SETUP” TAB (1/2) ............................................... 280
TABLE 3 - SELECTIONS OF THE “SETUP” TAB (2/2) ............................................... 281
TABLE 4 - ELEMENTS OF THE “BINARY INPUTS” PAGE ............................................ 284
TABLE 5 - ELEMENTS OF THE “KE GIVEN AS” AND “ZLOOP/ARC RES” TABS (1/2) ...... 289
TABLE 6 - ELEMENTS OF THE “KE GIVEN AS” AND “ZLOOP/ARC RES” TABS (2/2) ...... 290
TABLE 7 - TABS OF THE “TEST” PAGE ................................................................. 293
TABLE 8 - ELEMENTS OF THE “SHOT” PAGE ......................................................... 296
TABLE 9 - “TIMER SETTINGS” SELECTIONS (1/2) .................................................. 297
TABLE 10 - “TIMER SETTINGS” SELECTIONS (2/2) ................................................ 298
TABLE 11 - FAULT TYPE” PARAMETERS FOR THE FAULT EVOLUTION.......................... 299
TABLE 12 - ELEMENTS OF THE “SHOT” PAGE ....................................................... 305
TABLE 13 - ELEMENTS OF THE “BORDER” TAB (1/2) ............................................ 309
TABLE 14 - ELEMENTS OF THE “BORDER” TAB (1/2) ............................................ 310
TABLE 15 - ELEMENTS OF THE “IMPEDANCE SETTINGS” (1/2) ................................ 310
TABLE 16 - ELEMENTS OF THE “IMPEDANCE SETTING”S (2/2) ................................ 311
TABLE 17 - ELEMENTS OF THE “STATUS” TAB ...................................................... 313
TABLE 18 - ELEMENTS OF THE “RESULTS” TAB (1/2) ............................................ 314
TABLE 19 - ELEMENTS OF THE “RESULTS” TAB (2/2) ............................................ 315
DRTS XX FAMILY
Chapter
CHAPTER 7 - L.C.: OVERCURRENT ANSI 7
50-
50-51

LOCAL CONTROL:
OVERCURRENT ANSI 50-51

DOCUMENT No. MIE10170, Rev. 1.33, March 2015


TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 7 - L.C.: OVERCURRENT ANSI 50-51 ....................................... 319
1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................. 323
2 SETUP ............................................................................................ 324
2.1 SETUP/GENERATE PREFAULT AND APPLY V DC ..................................... 326
2.2 SETUP/BINARY INPUTS ..................................................................... 327
2.3 SETUP/NOMINAL CHAR .................................................................... 329
2.3.1 Setup/Nominal Char/Protection .......................................... 329
2.3.2 Setup/Nominal Char/Table.................................................. 330
2.4 SETUP/PREFAULT ............................................................................ 334
2.5 SETUP/DIRECTIONAL 50-51 .............................................................. 335
2.6 SETUP/TIMER ERROR ....................................................................... 337
2.7 SETUP/CURRENT ERROR ................................................................... 338
3 TEST ............................................................................................... 339
3.1 TEST/SHOT .................................................................................... 340
3.2 TEST/AUTO I-T ............................................................................... 344
4 GRAPH ........................................................................................... 347
5 STATUS .......................................................................................... 348
Page left intentionally blank.
1 INTRODUCTION
Purpose of this selection is to perform the automatic test of overcurrent
relays. With respect to the manual test, the key additional performance is
the possibility of defining the nominal relay curve, so that test results can be
compared to nominal values.
The following image exhibits the “Overcurrent ANSI 50-51” page:

Figure 1 - "Overcurrent ANSI 50-51" page

The following table lists the tabs of the “Overcurrent ANSI 50-51” page:

Tab Paragraph Display

Setup 2

Test 3

Graph 4

Status 5
Table 1 - Tabs of the “Overcurrent ANSI 50-51” page
2 SETUP
The following image exhibits the “Setup” tab:

Figure 2 – “Setup” tab

The following table lists the selections of the “Setup” tab:

Selection Paragraph Display

Generate Prefault
2.1
Apply V DC

Binary Inputs 2.2

Nominal Char 2.3

Table 2 - Selections of the “Setup” tab (1/2)


Selection Paragraph Display

Prefault 2.4

Directional 50-51 2.5

Timer Error 2.6

Current Error 2.7

Table 3 - Selections of the “Setup” tab (2/2)


2.1 Setup/Generate Prefault and Apply V DC
The following image exhibits the two commands “Generate Prefault” and
“Apply V DC”:

Figure 3 - "Generate Prefault" and "Apply V DC" commands

With these commands, the test set generates the prefault voltages (if the
Directional test is checked) and the auxiliary DC voltage, or the auxiliary DC
voltage only. Before giving the command, it is necessary to program the
nominal voltage in the Directional 50-51 selection.
2.2 Setup/Binary Inputs
The following image exhibits the selection “Binary Inputs”:

Figure 4 - "Binary Inputs" selection

This selection allows defining the trip inputs that are used during the tests,
and to associate them to the type of fault.
The following image exhibits the “Binary Inputs” page:

Figure 5 - "Binary inputs" page


The following table lists the elements of the “Binary Inputs” page:
Selection
Display
Description
Setup Digital Inputs
By pressing the arrows, the following
selections are available:
• Dry: there is no voltage applied; the
test set will apply a wetting voltage
of -30 V with the Interface board,
and of +16 V with the TRANSCOPE
board
• With DC voltages: TTL–5 V; 24 VDC;
48 VDC; > 110 VDC. If the voltage
input is less than 70% of the set
threshold, the input will be
considered zero
Trip Mode
It is possible to associate the type of fault
to the corresponding trip input. By
pressing the arrows, choose any input,
from C1 to C12 (C1÷C6; C9÷C12 with the
TRANSCOPE option): they are selected as
Normal Open.
The possible selections are the following:
• L1, L2, L3: Line faults
• L123 (PS): Positive Sequence faults
(they are always three phase faults)
• L123 (NS): Negative Sequence faults
(they are always three phase faults)
• LNEUT (I4): Neutral faults
• LSENS (I5): Sense faults
Table 4 - Elements of the “Binary Inputs” page
2.3 Setup/Nominal Char
This selection allows defining the nominal relay characteristic.
The following image exhibits the “Nominal Char” page:

Figure 6 - "Nominal Char" page

2.3.1 Setup/Nominal Char/Protection


Char/Protection
The following image exhibits the “Protection” selection:

Figure 7 – “Protection” selection

The possible type of protection are the following:


• Ground Fault: this is the standard overcurrent relay, that is tested with
single phase faults, with a selection performed in the Test setup window
• Phase Fault: this is the standard overcurrent relay, that is tested with
two phases faults, with a selection performed in the Test setup window
• Negative Sequence: these relays measure the negative current
sequence; the fault is three phase, with negative currents sequence
• Neutral: this is the zero current sequence protection that has different
current ratings with respect to the other ones. The fault is single phase,
on output I4 for DRTS 66 and DRTS 64
• Sensitive Ground: this is the sensitive ground protection that has
different current ratings with respect to the other ones. The fault is
single phase, on output I5 for DRTS 66 and DRTS 64

2.3.2 Setup/Nominal Char/Table


Char/Table
The following image exhibits the “Table” selection:

Figure 8 – “Table” selection

CAUTION: The nominal characteristic has to be programmed


because the following tests refer to it

In the table, there is the nominal characteristic relay curve. It is possible to


select the type of curve that can be the combination of any number of
curves. Entering the screen, it is possible to select the I>/IN setting; other
selections depend upon the type of curve.
• If the type of curve is “Definite Time”, the only other parameter is the
trip time. The diagram shows two straight lines, horizontal and vertical,
that meet at the point having the selected I/I> setting and the selected
trip time.
CAUTION: The X coordinate of the curve is the multiple of the
I/I> setting of the first threshold, and not I/IN; the coordinate
is called Ipu, that is per unit current; I> is the first relay
threshold. This means that the curve always starts with 1 on
the X axis
• If the type of curve is time dependent, the other parameter can be
either TD or T(10I>). See Appendix VII for the definition of the
parameters

Opening the page, there are some default settings; if they are good, press
OK, else to modify them, proceed as follows:
• Delete the undesired characteristics (SHIFT+DEL)
• Add a new element pressing the button “Add 50-51 element”:

Figure 9 - Button “Add 50-51 element”

• The following image exhibits the page after the pressure of the button
“Add 50-51 element” with the selection of “Definite Time”:

Figure 10 – Page of the button “Add 50-51 element” (1)

It is possible to define the additional element, using the following


selections:
• I>/IN: it is the threshold setting
• Overcurrent Curve Element: Definite Time
• T: it is the definite time setting
The following image exhibits the page with other selections for
“Overcurrent Curve Element”:

Figure 11 - Page of the button “Add 50-51 element” (2)

It is possible to define the additional element, using the following


selections:
• I>/IN: it is the threshold setting
• Overcurrent Curve Element: one of the 46 available types of curve
• TD: it is the time setting
• T10I>: it is an alternative of TD, when input TD this field is modified
according to the type of the selected curve. If vice versa input
T10I>, TD is modified
Pressing the OK button, the selection is accepted, the additional
element added, the diagram modified accordingly to the previous.
Pressing the Return button, the new element is ignored.
There is no limitation in the number of programmable steps.
A particular overcurrent curve element is the one called “Custom Curve”.
This selection applies when the curve is not in the list: it is possible build up
a curve. Compute a number of points of the nominal curve, that have
coordinates (I1, t1), (I2, T2) and so on. Then, input these coordinate pairs,
one by one: the program interpolates linearly these points.
The following image exhibits the resulting curve:

Figure 12 - The resulting curve of the Custom selection

The approximation is increased by adding intermediate points.


2.4 Setup/Prefault
The following image exhibits the “Prefault” selection:

Figure 13 - "Prefault" selection

The following table lists the elements of the “Prefault” selection:

Element Description

I nom (A) It is the nominal relay current; usually, 1 A or 5 A


During the test, the test current could reach any value.
I max (A) This parameter sets the maximum test current: it is
particularly important or relays rated 1 A, because
otherwise they could be damaged
It is possible to program any nominal frequency value
F nom (Hz) between 40 and 70 Hz.
Default value: 50 Hz
It is the auxiliary DC voltage used to power up the relay
V DC (V) under test.
Range: 12÷260 V
Default value: 110 V
Table 5 - Elements of the Prefault selection
2.5 Setup/Directional 50-
50-51
The following image exhibits the “Directional 50-51” selection:

Figure 14 - "Directional 50-51" selection

This selection allows testing over-current relays with a directional capability.


The following image exhibits the programming area after the checking of the
selection:

Figure 15 – “Directional 50-51” programming area


The following table list the elements of the programming area
“Directional 50-51”:

Element Description

V nom (V) It is the nominal voltage.


Default value: 57.8 V
φ V/I(°) It is the angle of the current with respect to the voltage:
the positive angle corresponds to a capacitive load
Table 6 - Elements of the programming area “Directional 50-51”

When the test is performed, the current is applied at the programmed phase
angle with respect to the voltage. Changing the angle it is possible to verify
the directional sensitivity.
2.6 Setup/Timer
Setup/Timer Error
The following image exhibits the “Timer Error” selection:

Figure 16 - "Timer Error" selection

This selection allows defining the test results time errors.


The following table list the elements of the selection “Timer Error”:

Element Description

max % The maximum percentage error is the maximum error


acceptable for the relay
The min abs parameter is the minimum time error: this
min abs (ms) applies in particular to the instantaneous trip time, where
a percentage error definition would be too severe
Table 7 - Elements of the selection “Timer Error”
2.7 Setup/Current Error
The following image exhibits the “Current Error” selection:

Figure 17 - "Current Error" selection

This selection allows defining the maximum threshold tests current error.
3 TEST
This selection allows setting the relay test parameters.
The following image exhibits the “Test” tab:

Figure 18 – “Test” tab

The following table lists the tabs of “Test”:

Tab Paragraph Display

Shot 3.1

Auto I-t 3.2


Table 8 - Tabs of “Test”
3.1 Test/Shot
Test/Shot
The following image exhibits the “Shot” page:

Figure 19 – “Shot” page

The following table lists the selections of the “Shot” page:


Selection
Display
Description
Current Parameters
The two parameters are related to each other: the
absolute current I (A) can be transformed in the
other one, IR (x Ipu), because Ipu is the current (in
A) of the first threshold, defined in the Setup
window for the characteristic curve.
Test at 3 A
First threshold at 0.5 IN
IN = 5 A
Ipu = 2.5 A
IR = 3/2.5 = 1.2
The button “+” allows to add the programmed
value to the list that is being created at the bottom
of the screen. It is possible to program an endless
number of tests, without actually starting them.
After the programming, start the test session
pressing the START key, F1: all tests is performed,
one after the other, and the corresponding test
results will be displayed.
Table 9 - Selections of the “Shot” tab (1/4)
Selection
Display
Description
Timer Settings and Trip
• t Pre: it is the prefault duration
before the fault is applied. Once a
sequence of tests is programmed,
two tests of the sequence can be
executed immediately one after the
other, but this can be a problem,
because the relay does not have the
time to reset, and goes to a lockout
situation. In order to allow the relay
to reset, it is necessary to program
the prefault duration, which should
not be zero
• t Max: it is the maximum test time; if
there is no trip within t Max, the test
result is “----“
• CB Delay: In the real case, fault
parameters are removed from the
relay after the time taken by the CB
to open the line, i.e. about 50 ms
after the relay trip. After the relay
trip, fault parameters are
maintained until the CB delay
expires
• Trip: it displays the measured trip
time
Table 10 - Selections of the “Shot” tab (2/4)
Selection
Display
Description
Fault Type
• Phase fault: the current is applied to
the selected phase, that can be L1,
L2, L3 (earth faults); the test current
is injected on I1, I2, I3 respectively
• L12, L23, L31: dual phase faults. The
programmed fault current is applied
to outputs I1 and I2; I2 and I3; I3 and
I1 respectively; the phase angle
between them is 120°
• L123 (PS): three phase fault, with
positive sequence. The programmed
fault current is applied to outputs I1,
I2 and I3; the phase angle between
them is 120°
• L123 (NS): three phase fault,
negative sequence. Current
amplitudes are the same, and the
phase sequence is the negative one:
I1; I2 at 120°; I3 at 240°
• Neutral (I4): one current is applied to
I4 (not available on DRTS 34)
• Sensing (I5): one current is applied to
I5 (not available on DRTS 34)
Table 11 - Selections of the “Shot” tab (3/4)
Selection
Display
Description
Table
As soon as the creation of a test by pressing
the button “+”, a new line is added to the
Table. Test parameters are the following:
• the type of fault
• the test current, in I and in IR (IR = I/Ipu)
Results
The “Results” button opens the following page:

The table shows the programmed values, together with test results; they are also
summarized in the lower part of the window. Reaching for a test result, the
following parameters are shown in the Results area:
• Fault: the type of faults (single phase, two phase, three phase, negative
sequence)
• Result: If the trip time is the nominal one, plus or minus the programmed
tolerance, test result is OK: this is shown by the check icon . Otherwise,
the white cross on a red spot marks a wrong trip delay
• I (A): the test current
• IR (x Ipu): the test current
• t (s): the measured trip time
• Tnom (s): the nominal delay at the test current, derived from the nominal
characteristic
• Err-T (s): This is the time error with respect to the nominal delay, derived
from the nominal characteristic
• Im (x Ipu): Nominal current
• Err-I (%): the percentage current error with respect to the nominal current,
derived from the nominal characteristic
Table 12 - Selections of the “Shot” tab (4/4)
3.2 Test/Auto
Test/Auto I-
I-t
This test allows checking the relay characteristic curve. The program
generates a number of tests, starting from the programmed test start
current, and incrementing the test current of the programmed current
increment until the maximum programmed current is reached. On each test
the program measures the corresponding delay: test results are the relay
characteristic curve.
The following image exhibits the “Auto I-t” tab:

Figure 20 - "Auto I-t" tab


The following table lists the selections of the “Auto I-t” tab:
Selection
Display
Description
Current Parameters
The area is divided in two rows: A and Ipu. The first
line is current in A; the second line is a number, Ipu,
in per units.
• I Start: this is the minimum test current. It can
be less than Ipu, to verify that there is no trip
with that current
• I Step: this is the current change between
tests
• I Stop: This is the maximum test current. It
should be greater than the biggest current
threshold
The first purpose to use the I-t test is to have a course idea of current settings, and to
measure the actual trip times of time independent settings. For this purpose, program large
current steps: the characteristic curve and definite time current thresholds is found with a
coarse resolution. The following diagram shows the test result in this case:

CAUTION: The blank dots correspond to no trip results: they are necessary
to verify the Ipu setting
Table 13 - Selections of the “Auto I-t” tab (1/2)
Selection
Display
Description
The second purpose is to measure accurately a definite time current
threshold. For this purpose, the start and stop currents are closed to the
nominal value, a little smaller and bigger respectively; the step is as small
as desired, based upon the test result accuracy.
The following diagram shows the test result (I> test):

Dots are much closer, and define exactly the I> limit.
Timer Settings and Trip
Refer to the Paragraph 3.1
Fault Type
Refer to the Paragraph 3.1
Table
Refer to the Paragraph 3.1
CAUTION: In the list of tests, tests are arranged with the
higher current first. This is because with high current the relay
should trip: if it does not, this tells that there is something
wrong in the programming, and it is possible to avoid wasting
time
Results
Refer to the Paragraph 3.1
Table 14 - Selections of the “Auto I-t” tab (2/2)
4 GRAPH
The following image exhibits the “Graph” tab:

Figure 21 - "Graph" tab

The page shows the nominal characteristic curve, and the measured trip
times as a function of the test current.
5 STATUS
Purpose of this selection is to watch the test set operation during long tests,
i.e. tests where parameters do not change too fast. In fact, the refresh of
the window is performed every 0.5 s.
The following image exhibits the “Status” tab:

Figure 22 - "Status" tab

The following table lists the elements of the “Status” tab:

Element Description
Upper side: the display shows all parameters being currently
1
generated
C1÷C12 line: lights on mean that the corresponding contact
2
has tripped
3 V DC: auxiliary DC voltage supply

4 Trip: last test trip delay


Yellow area: during test evolution, it is shown the number of
5
the test in progress
Table 15 - Elements of the “Status” tab
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1 - "OVERCURRENT ANSI 50-51" PAGE ................................................. 323
FIGURE 2 – “SETUP” TAB ................................................................................ 324
FIGURE 3 - "GENERATE PREFAULT" AND "APPLY V DC" COMMANDS....................... 326
FIGURE 4 - "BINARY INPUTS" SELECTION ............................................................ 327
FIGURE 5 - "BINARY INPUTS" PAGE ................................................................... 327
FIGURE 6 - "NOMINAL CHAR" PAGE .................................................................. 329
FIGURE 7 – “PROTECTION” SELECTION ............................................................... 329
FIGURE 8 – “TABLE” SELECTION ....................................................................... 330
FIGURE 9 - BUTTON “ADD 50-51 ELEMENT” ...................................................... 331
FIGURE 10 – PAGE OF THE BUTTON “ADD 50-51 ELEMENT” (1) ............................ 331
FIGURE 11 - PAGE OF THE BUTTON “ADD 50-51 ELEMENT” (2) ............................. 332
FIGURE 12 - THE RESULTING CURVE OF THE CUSTOM SELECTION ............................. 333
FIGURE 13 - "PREFAULT" SELECTION ................................................................. 334
FIGURE 14 - "DIRECTIONAL 50-51" SELECTION ................................................... 335
FIGURE 15 – “DIRECTIONAL 50-51” PROGRAMMING AREA ................................... 335
FIGURE 16 - "TIMER ERROR" SELECTION ............................................................ 337
FIGURE 17 - "CURRENT ERROR" SELECTION ........................................................ 338
FIGURE 18 – “TEST” TAB ................................................................................ 339
FIGURE 19 – “SHOT” PAGE ............................................................................. 340
FIGURE 20 - "AUTO I-T" TAB ........................................................................... 344
FIGURE 21 - "GRAPH" TAB .............................................................................. 347
FIGURE 22 - "STATUS" TAB ............................................................................. 348
LIST OF TABLES
TABLES
TABLE 1 - TABS OF THE “OVERCURRENT ANSI 50-51” PAGE ................................. 323
TABLE 2 - SELECTIONS OF THE “SETUP” TAB (1/2) ............................................... 324
TABLE 3 - SELECTIONS OF THE “SETUP” TAB (2/2) ............................................... 325
TABLE 4 - ELEMENTS OF THE “BINARY INPUTS” PAGE ............................................ 328
TABLE 5 - ELEMENTS OF THE PREFAULT SELECTION ............................................... 334
TABLE 6 - ELEMENTS OF THE PROGRAMMING AREA “DIRECTIONAL 50-51” .............. 336
TABLE 7 - ELEMENTS OF THE SELECTION “TIMER ERROR”....................................... 337
TABLE 8 - TABS OF “TEST” .............................................................................. 339
TABLE 9 - SELECTIONS OF THE “SHOT” TAB (1/4) ................................................ 340
TABLE 10 - SELECTIONS OF THE “SHOT” TAB (2/4) .............................................. 341
TABLE 11 - SELECTIONS OF THE “SHOT” TAB (3/4) .............................................. 342
TABLE 12 - SELECTIONS OF THE “SHOT” TAB (4/4) .............................................. 343
TABLE 13 - SELECTIONS OF THE “AUTO I-T” TAB (1/2) ......................................... 345
TABLE 14 - SELECTIONS OF THE “AUTO I-T” TAB (2/2) ......................................... 346
TABLE 15 - ELEMENTS OF THE “STATUS” TAB ...................................................... 348
DRTS XX FAMILY
Chapter 8
CHAPTER 8 - L.C.: OTHER SELECTIONS
LOCAL CONTROL:
OTHER SELECTIONS

DOCUMENT No. MIE10170, Rev. 1.33, March 2015


TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 8 - L.C.: OTHER SELECTIONS ................................................... 351
1 HEADER ......................................................................................... 355
2 AUXILIARY SETTINGS ..................................................................... 356
3 CIRCUIT BREAKER .......................................................................... 358
4 AMPLIFIERS DIAGNOSTIC REPORT ................................................. 364
4.1 CONFIGURATION ............................................................................. 366
4.2 SUPPLY .......................................................................................... 368
4.3 TEMPERATURE ................................................................................ 372
4.4 MEASUREMENTS ............................................................................. 375
5 SAVE .............................................................................................. 382
6 CONFIGURATION ........................................................................... 383
6.1 SOFTWARE ..................................................................................... 385
6.2 COMMUNICATION ........................................................................... 388
6.3 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION ............................................................ 390
6.4 AMPLIFIERS .................................................................................... 392
Page left intentionally blank.
1 HEADER
The following image exhibits the “Header” page:

Figure 1 - "Header" page

These data are fundamental because test results is grouped according to the
header. Therefore, when you are to perform a test, the first thing is to input
the test header; next, you can perform tests. When you are finished, save
results with this header; then, as you change the relay, do not forget to
change the header. The test set automatically associates to these data the
test date and time, which is used as search criteria.
2 AUXILIARY SETTINGS
The following image exhibits the “Auxiliary Settings” page:

Figure 2 - "Auxiliary Settings" page

The following table lists the selections of the page “Auxiliary Settings”:
Selection
Display
Description
Auxiliary Voltage
Modern relays, after power-on, take some time for the
internal diagnostics. Usually, when leaving a PC
program, also the auxiliary supply are loosen; with the
next program it is necessary to wait for the relay
diagnostic to finish, before it operates again.
It is possible to have a continuous supply entering this
page.
• Input the desired value for the auxiliary DC supply
• Press ON: the auxiliary DC voltage is generated.
Go to the test program, it is possible to avoid
setting the auxiliary voltage; however, resetting
the program or leaving it, the auxiliary voltage is
reset
• To avoid this, check the box “Disable DC changes”:
the auxiliary voltage is no more reset, until
pressing OFF
Table 1 - Selections of the page “Auxiliary Settings” (1/2)
Selection
Display
Description
Burden Settings
When the test involves current generation,
before the first test the test set measures
the relay impedance. In some older relay,
the burden changes: it is high while the
relay starts, then, when the relay measures
the impedance, the burden is low. In this
situation, may be that the high burden is
too high, and the test set signals overload.
This is too bad, because the lower burden
often can be accepted by the test set.
The way out from this is the following:
• The following table shows the
maximum burden as a function of the
test current:
I 1 2.5 5 7.5 10 12.5 15 20 25 32

Z 10 5 2.5 1.8 1.3 1 0.9 0.7 0.5 0.4

• Read the maximum burden at the test


current, and input it into the Z field
• Check the box “Use as the Default
Burden”
• For instance, having the test at 7.5 A,
input the value 1.8 Ω
• The test set does not measure the
actual impedance any more, and this is
good, because the initial high burden
does not last enough to be detected as
an overload
CAUTION: Do not abuse this selection because when tha
actual burden is greater the one set, the current output has
distortion and therefore an error
Table 2 - Selections of the page “Auxiliary Settings” (2/2)
3 CIRCUIT BREAKER
When a relay is installed in the plant, the normal operation is that, after the
relay trips, the CB opens. The substation supervisor knows that the CB has
actually opened by two logic signals, which are the CB Closed and the CB
Open signals. These signals are one opposite to the other, but during the CB
opening, there is a small time delay between when the CB is not closed and
when it is open, and vice versa.
Many relays receive these signals, and do not reset the trip command unless
they see that the CB has opened. In addition, they do not set up again for a
new intervention unless they see that the CB has been closed by the
Recloser command.
With these relays, it would be impossible to perform the automated tests of
ISA programs; besides, it would be too long manually resetting them
between two tests.
The solution is providing the possibility of simulating these signals, taking
advantage of the DRTS XX auxiliary outputs. Now, it should be possible to
add the feature when DRTS XX is operated locally, and it should be possible
to modify all automated test programs. The solution adopted is to add the
CB simulation as a locally programmable function. If the relay is locally
tested, there is no problem; if an automated test program is used, when the
CB simulation is selected, DRTS XX adds this operation at the end of all tests,
being trip or ramp, while the program ignores it. This is possible because,
during the simulation, there is no additional timing to be measured.
The following image exhibits the type of test sequence:

Figure 3 - Type of test sequence


The following image exhibits the “Circuit Breaker” page, which performs the
CB simulation:

Figure 4 - “Circuit Breaker” page

Selected parameters are the followings:


• Enabled: when selected, DRTS XX is adding the CB simulation after
each test
• CB Status Signals: this selection cannot be modified. The CB
CLOSED signal is simulated by the binary output A3, while the CB
OPEN signal is simulated by the binary output A4. This means that
binary outputs A1 and A2 are available for any further operation
• Timings from Open command: the following image exhibits the
timing diagram:

Figure 5 - Timing diagram

• The sequence starts when, locally or from the PC, a fault


simulation of any type is generated
• After some delay, the relay generates the Trip command
• DRTS XX usually stops here the fault generation, and goes
to the prefault generation for the next test. The only
exception is when the CB delay simulation is selected: in
this instance, the fault is removed after this delay
• When this CB simulation is selected, the CB delay
simulation is ignored, and A3 is opened after the delay T1,
which is the delay to its not closed state
• Next step: after the delay “t2” with respect to the A3
opening. A4 is closed. This delay is called “Intermediate
state”
• Next step: the fault is removed after the further delay “t3”
with respect to the “Open” signal commutation
• Last step: after the delay “t4” the CB comes back to its
initial situation; this simulates the reception of the “Close”
command, coming from the Recloser. Now the relay is
ready for another test
• The delay “t4” is generated according to the next selection
The following image exhibits a normal programming for
the CB simulation:

Figure 6 - Normal programming for the CB simulation

• Delay “t1” is the CB open delay: it usually ranges between


20 and 50 ms
• The intermediate state is usually short: 10 or 20 ms
• Clear fault delay is the arc suppression time: 10 to 20 ms
• CB close command: the following selections are available:
• Automatic or C12. With the first selection, DRTS XX
automatically simulates the CB close, after the selected
delay. The second selection is for the case that the Close
command is available. In this instance, it is possible to
simulate the CB close as the command arrives to input
C12, which is dedicated to this function, and cannot be
used for normal testing purposes
• In case of Automatic selection, it is possible to count the
time from when the “Open” command is sensed, or from
when the CB is actually open. The timing diagram above
shows the two instances, as “t4” or “(t4)” respectively
• If the “Close” command is available, the page is as follows:

Figure 7 - Close command available

It is possible to select the status of C12, “Normally Open” or


“Normally Closed”, and the electric level, “Dry” or “With voltage”.
The following image exhibits the time diagram corresponding to the

pressing of F5 (shift) and F1 (the upper right corner icon ):

Figure 8 – Time diagram

“t2” adds to “t1”, and “t3” adds to “t1+t2”; therefore, “t4” is automatically
displayed as greater than “t1+t2+t3”: a smaller value is not accepted.
To exit the diagram, press the knob.
4 AMPLIFIERS DIAGNOSTIC REPORT
Purpose of this very important selection is gathering information, which, in
case of fault or of doubt, help diagnosing the problem. So, in case of
problems, before getting in touch with ISA, please enter this session, and
verify if values are in the range explained here below. Very often it is
possible to understand what the source of the problem is, and correct
without any further trouble. If this is not the case, please, report the
readings to ISA: this helps understanding the problem, and deciding the
corrective action.
Selecting the icon “Page” in the Main Control Screen, a number of different
pages is accessible.
The following image exhibits the “Amplifiers Diagnostic Report” page:

Figure 9 - “Amplifiers Diagnostic Report” page


The following table lists the “Amplifiers Diagnostic Report” selections:

Item Description Display


Conf.
1
Configuration
Supply
2
Supply values
Temp.
3
Temperatures
Meas.
4 Measurements (default
selection)
Table 3 - “Amplifiers Diagnostic Report” selections

To leave each page, press SHIFT+F5 and ESC +F3. The following image
exhibits the icon in the upper right corner:

Figure 10 – Upper right corner icon


4.1 Configuration
This selection allows gathering detailed information about the device
firmware configuration.
The following image exhibits the “Conf.” page:

Figure 11 - “Conf.” page

It is possible to select, on the first line, to display parameters related to


current generators or to voltage generators. There are four groups as follow:
• currents from I1 to I3
• currents from I4 to I6
• voltages from V1 to V3
• voltages from V4 to V6
The page above refers to current amplifiers I1÷I3; there is a similar page for
the other current and voltage outputs.
The following table lists the configuration parameters:

Parameter Description
It is the revision number of the firmware running
DSP FW version on the DSP processor; it is the same for all currents
and voltages
It is the revision number of the firmware running
PIC FW version on the PIC processor; it is the same for all currents
and voltages
Controller type It is I for currents, and V for voltages
It is 1 for currents I1 to I3; 2 for currents I to I6; 3
Address identifier
for voltages V1 to V3; 4 for voltages V4 to V6
FPGA0 and FPGA1
The same code for all amplifiers
version
It is the serial number of the Printed Circuit Board;
Control board
it is different for currents I1 to I3; currents I4 to I6;
serial number
voltages V1 to V3; voltages V4 to V6
It is the serial number of the Printed Circuit Board;
Amplifier board
it is different for currents I1 to I3; currents I to I6;
serial number
voltages V1 to V3; voltages V4 to V6
It is the maximum voltage which can be applied to
Max reverse the relays which open the outputs without
supply damaging them; it is 100 V for current outputs, and
250 V for voltage outputs
Control board
activated The same code for all amplifiers
protections
Table 4 - Configuration parameters
4.2 Supply
The device hosts a number of circuits, which are fed by different supplies.
This page allows checking that their values are correct.
The following image exhibits the “Supply” page:

Figure 12 - “Supply” page

It is possible to select, on the first line, to display parameters related to


current generators or to voltage generators. There are four groups as follow:
• currents from I1 to I3
• currents from I4 to I6
• voltages from V1 to V3
• voltages from V4 to V6
The page above refers to current amplifiers I1÷I3; there is a similar page for
outputs I4÷I6.
The following table lists the common parameters to all current outputs:

Parameter Description
It feeds the logic circuits of all logic boards, and of
+5 V supply current amplifier boards. The value is OK when it is
in the range from 4.75 V to 5.25 V
It feeds the analogue circuits of current amplifier
+15 V supply boards. The value is OK when it is in the range from
14.5 V to 15.5 V
It feeds the analogue circuits of current amplifier
-15 V supply boards. The value is OK when it is in the range from
-14.5 V to -15.5 V
Table 5 - Common parameters to all current outputs

The following table lists the specific parameters for each current output:

Parameter Description
After power-on, if no current has been generated
I1 (2, 3, 4, 5, 6) yet, normal values are around 2 V. After the first
positive supply generation, the value is OK when it is in the range
from 7.5 V to 8.5 V
After power-on, if no current has been generated
I1 (2, 3, 4, 5, 6) yet, normal values are around -2 V. After the first
negative supply generation, the value is OK when it is in the range
from -7.5 V to -8.5 V
Table 6 - Specific parameters for each current output

CAUTION: Generating current outputs, these values change


as a function of the burden. For instance, generating 10 A
from I1 on a burden of 1 Ω, the supply values range from 15
to 18 V, and it is the same for all current outputs. For the
explanation about how to generate outputs, see the
Paragraph 4.4
The following image exhibits the “Supply” page in case of selection of a
voltage from V1 to V3 (there is a similar page for outputs V4 to V6):

Figure 13 - “Supply” page in case of selection of a voltage from V1 to V3

The following table lists the common parameters to all voltage outputs:

Parameter Description
It feeds the logic circuits of all logic boards, and of
+5 V supply voltage amplifier boards. The value is OK when it is
in the range from 4.75 V to 5.25 V
It feeds the analogue circuits of voltage amplifier
+15 V supply boards. The value is OK when it is in the range from
14.5 V to 15.5 V
It feeds the analogue circuits of current amplifier
-15 V supply boards. The value is OK when it is in the range from
-14.5 V to -15.5 V
Table 7 - Common parameters to all voltage outputs
The following table lists the specific parameters for each current output:

Parameter Description
V1 (2, 3, 4, 5, 6) The value is OK when it is in the range from 65 V to
positive supply 75 V
V1 (2, 3, 4, 5, 6) The value is OK when it is in the range from - 65 V
negative supply to - 75 V
Table 8 - Specific parameters for each current output

CAUTION: Generating voltage outputs, these values change


as a function of the output. For instance, generating 57 V,
supply values range from 110 to 116 V. For the explanation
about how to generate outputs, see the Paragraph 4.4
4.3 Temperature
If amplifiers are too hot, because of a long, high values generation, the
device stops, and gives an over-temperature alarm. With this selection, it is
possible to read the temperatures, and see them reducing as the device
cools down. An excess of temperature on only one of the monitored circuits
locates a fault.
The following image exhibits the “Temp.” page:

Figure 14 - “Temp.” page

It is possible to select, on the first line, to display parameters related to


current generators or to voltage generators. There are four groups, which
correspond to the four amplifiers as follow:
• currents from I1 to I3
• currents from I4 to I6
• voltages from V1 to V3
• voltages from V4 to V6
The page above refers to current amplifiers I1 to I3; there is a similar page
for outputs I4 to I6.
On each current amplifier, there are the following:
• A front board, which hosts the logic control circuits
• A rear board, which hosts the analogue circuits
• An heat sink
• Three amplifiers, which are separated in two: positive and negative
waveform
• Three high accuracy shunts, which measure the output current
For all of these critical points, the page displays the temperature. In case of
problems, please check also I4 to I6.

The following image exhibits the voltage amplifiers V1÷V3 page (there is a
similar page for outputs V4 to V6):

Figure 15 - Voltage amplifiers V1÷V3 page


On each voltage amplifier, there are the following:
• A front board, which hosts the logic control circuits
• A rear board, which hosts the analogue circuits
• Three amplifiers, which are separated in two: positive and negative
waveform
On all circuits, the stand-by (no generation) temperature is 35 °C to 40 °C,
when the external temperature is 25 °C. When the external temperature is
40 °C, the internal temperature grows to 45 °C to 50 °C, and fans keep on
cooling circuits.
During generation, the temperature grows; the over-temperature alarm
intervenes when a circuit has a temperature greater than 70 °C. For the
explanation about how to generate outputs, see the Paragraph 4.4.
4.4 Measurements
Current and voltage amplifiers have circuits, which measure the
corresponding output current and voltage respectively. A closed loop
control ensures that output values match the programmed ones.
In addition to this, on current outputs other circuits measure the output
voltage, and, vice versa, on voltage outputs, other circuits measure the
output current. These circuits are not part of the feedback loop: they are
used to verify the burden connected to the test set, and to decide whether
it is possible to generate the programmed current or voltage, or in case of
an overload situation. For instance, open circuit for the current; short circuit
for the voltage. In such instances, the operator is alerted.
All measurements are RMS values; their accuracy is 5%.
The following image exhibits the “Meas.” page:

Figure 16 - “Meas.” page


It is possible to select, on the first line, to display parameters related to
current generators or to voltage generators. There are four groups, which
correspond to the four amplifiers:
• currents from I1 to I3
• currents from I4 to I6
• voltages from V1 to V3
• voltages from V4 to V6
The page above refers to current amplifiers I1÷I3.
The following table lists the measurements displayed for each current
amplifier:

Parameter Description
It is the product of the programmed output current
Output voltage by the burden. The minimum value is zero (no
generation); the maximum is 16 V
Output current It is the programmed value
This value should be zero, as there should be no
voltage applied to current outputs. Current
amplifiers are separated from the output sockets
by relays. Before the very first generation
Reverse supply command, including zero, the test set measures
the reverse supply; if it is more than 25 V, it alerts
the operator, and the test is aborted. In this
situation, it is possible to read what is the reverse
supply amplitude, and correct the problem
Current amplifiers are class AB; when outputs are
zero, they are crossed by the bias current. A value
Bias current
greater than 250 mA tells that there is something
wrong in the circuit
Table 9 - Measurements displayed for each current amplifier
The following image exhibits the voltage amplifiers V1÷V3:

Figure 17 - Voltage amplifiers V1÷V3

The following table lists the measurements displayed for each voltage
amplifier:
Parameter Description
Output voltage It is the programmed value
It is the ratio of the programmed output voltage
and the burden. The minimum value is zero (no
generation). The maximum is a function of the
Output current
output voltage; it is 0.8 A from 0 to 125 V; then, it
decreases so that the product Vout*Iout is not more
than 100 VA, and it is 0.33 A at 300 V
This value should be zero, as there should be no
voltage applied to voltage outputs. Voltage
amplifiers are separated from the output sockets
by relays. Before the very first generation
Reverse supply command, including zero, the test set measures
the reverse supply; if it is more than 25 V, it alerts
the operator, and the test is aborted. In this
situation, here you can read what is the reverse
supply amplitude, and correct the problem
Table 10 - Measurements displayed for each voltage amplifier
A very important feature is that it is possible to generate output currents
and voltages while the “Amplifier Diagnostic Report” page is open. To this
purpose, proceed as follows:
• Go to the “Manual Control” Home page, and select “Prefault”. The
following image exhibits the “Manual Mode” page:

Figure 18 - “Manual Mode” page


• In the “Prefault” page, program the currents and voltages to be
generated. The following image exhibits the generated 57 V on V1,
V2 and V3, and 10 A on I1:

Figure 19 - Example of Prefault Values generation

• Press OK and leave the page: programmed values are not


generated
• Now, come to the “Amplifier Diagnostic Report” page. Press START:
the prefault-programmed values are generated. It is possible to
read them, and verify that the generation is correct
• The following image exhibits the measurements for I1 to I3:

Figure 20 - Measurements example for I1 to I3

• From the values of current and voltage, it is possible easily to


compute the burden impedance, which is Z = V / I
• In this instance, 10 A are generated. The output voltage is 10 V; this
means that the burden is 1 Ω
• The following image exhibits the measurements for V1 to V3:

Figure 21 – Measurements example for V1 to V3

• In this instance, generating 57 V are generated. The output current


of V1 is 0.26 A; this means that the burden is 57 / 0.26 = 220 Ω
• When the impedance is known, in case of problems, go to
Chapter 2 Paragraph 3.2 for the current and to the Chapter 2
Paragraph 3.6 for the voltage, and verify if the burden exceeds the
limits. If so, please correct, as explained

CAUTION: If, when generating currents and voltages, an


overload message appears, it is possible to measure the
burden impedance by reducing to one tenth the current and
voltage outputs. Then, it is possible to compute impedances,
and verify

CAUTION: Remember that, in case of high current


impedance, it is possible to generate outputs by-passing the
overload alarm, setting the burden impedance as explained
in Chapter 2 Paragraph 3.2
5 SAVE
Refer to the Chapter 4 “Local Control”, Paragraph 2 Table 6.
6 CONFIGURATION
The following image exhibits the “Settings” page after the selection of the
toothed icon in the Main Control Screen:

Figure 22 - "Settings" page

The following table lists the selections of the “Settings” page:

Selection Paragraph Display


It is possible to set the date and
time that is used when results
are saved.
To set the clock, enter the
corresponding window:
Instrument
changing some value, the green
Data Time check icon turns into yellow.
At the end, press the check icon
again: it turns into green again,
and the time is acquired by the
clock

Software 6.1

Table 11 - Selections of the “Settings” page (1/2)


Selection Paragraph Display

Communication 6.2

Hardware
6.3
Configuration

Amplifiers 6.4

Table 12 - Selections of the “Settings” page (2/2)


6.1 Software
The following image exhibits the “Software” page:

Figure 23 - "Software" page


The following table lists the elements of the “Software” selections:
Selection
Display
Description
Language
Language of messages on the display.
Few seconds after the change, the
selected language is available
Increments
Amount of the increment or decrement
when the keyboard is not used to input
values. Input means are the following:
• The right and left arrows
• The knob
• The up arrow (F5) plus knob
There are three steps that can be
selected:
• Small increment/decrement (using
the right and left arrows)
• Medium increment/decrement
(using the knob)
• Large increment/decrement (using
the up arrow (F5) plus knob)
The table displays the
increments/decrements programmed as
a default. However, if it is desired to have
different values, enter the table and
modify the values
Table 13 - Elements of the “Software” selections (1/2)
Selection
Display
Description
Screen Saver Delay (s)
The display suffers of a memory effect: if
an image stays unchanged on the screen
for a long time, when eventually it is
changed there is some amount of
persistence of the former image. This is
why, after the programmed delay, the
window turns into black, with a moving
ISA logo
Synchronization to the mains
The selection is enabled only if the
external option “Line synchronizer” is
sensed; that is, plugged into the mains,
and connected to the IRIG-B input, via
the optical fibre provided.
When the selection is enabled, it is
possible to synchronize or not
synchronize the generation. The
selection applies to local test and to
remote tests.
For both instances, when the
synchronization is selected, the icon is
displayed on the top of the screen
(refer to Chapter 2 Paragraph 4)
Ways of showing V, I in remote control
Refer to Chapter 2 Paragraph 4
Table 14 - Elements of the “Software” selections (2/2)
6.2 Communication
The “Communication” selection allows understanding if the ETHERNET
communication is available or not.
The following table lists the possible two messages of the “Communication”
selection:

Description Display

If there is ETHERNET communication, the


test set address is displayed

If there is no ETHERNET communication,


the test set displays “No Network”
Table 15 - Messages of the “Communication” selection

The following image exhibits the “Communication” page:

Figure 24 - "Communication" page


The following table lists the elements of the “Communication” selections:
Selection
Display
Description
Communication Board
• Board Serial Number: it informs
about the number of the
communication board, PWA11477
• FW IRIG/B: it is the revision of the
Firmware on board of the
communication board, which
controls the IRIG-B interface
Ethernet
• FW Version: it is the revision of the
Firmware on board of the
communication board, which
controls the ETHERNET interface
• Board S/N: it informs about the
number of the ETHERNET board
• Listening Port: communication
protocol port number
• Enable DHCP: as soon as the OK
icon is pressed, the host changes
the IP address of the test set,
assigning it the first free IP address
• Disable DHCP: it is possible to
program the test set IP address.
The explanation of the meaning of
addresses is given in Appendix VIII
Table 16 - Elements of the “Communication” selections
6.3 Hardware Configuration
The following image exhibits the “Hardware Configuration” page:

Figure 25 - "Hardware Configuration" page

The following table lists the elements of the “Hardware Configuration”


selections:
Selection
Display
Description
Hardware Configuration
• Model Type: it recalls the type of DRTS XX: 66,
64, 34
• Board S/N: it is the number of the
microprocessor board
• IEC61850-8 option: if on, the option is
available
• IEC61580-9 option: if on, the option is
available
• Transcope option: if on, the option is available
• FW Version: it is the revision number of the
boost firmware
• Instrument S/N: it is the number that has been
assigned in factory. It cannot be changed, and
has to be communicated in case of fault
Table 17 - Elements of the “Hardware Configuration” selections (1/2)
Selection
Display
Description
Power Supply
• FW Version: it is the revision number
of the power supply module
• Serial Number: it is the number that
has been assigned in factory. It
cannot be changed, and has to be
communicated in case of fault
Table 18 - Elements of the “Hardware Configuration” selections (2/2)
6.4 Amplifiers
The following image exhibits the “Amplifiers” page:

Figure 26 - "Amplifiers" page

The following table lists the elements of the “Amplifiers” selections:


Selection
Display
Description
Amplifiers
First settings: voltage amplifiers. The
following table lists the variants for
DRTS XX models:
DRTS66 1,2,3 4,5,6
DRTS64/34 1,2 3,4

Second settings: current amplifiers. The


following table lists the variants for
DRTS XX models:
DRTS66/64 1,2,3 4,5,6
DRTS34 1,2,3 N.A.
Table 19 - Elements of the “Amplifiers” selections (1/2)
Selection
Display
Description
• DSP FW Version: it is the revision
number of the DSP controlling the
amplifier
• PIC FW Version: it is the revision
number of the supervising
microprocessor controlling the
amplifier
• Control Board S/N: it is the number
of the control board PWA11775
• Amplifier Board S/N: it the number
of the voltage amplifier board
PWA11772 or of the current
amplifier board PWA11772

CAUTION: In case of fault, this information should be sent to


the Agent and to ISA

Table 20 - Elements of the “Amplifiers” selections (2/2)


Page left intentionally blank.
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1 - "HEADER" PAGE ............................................................................. 355
FIGURE 2 - "AUXILIARY SETTINGS" PAGE ............................................................ 356
FIGURE 3 - TYPE OF TEST SEQUENCE .................................................................. 358
FIGURE 4 - “CIRCUIT BREAKER” PAGE ................................................................ 359
FIGURE 5 - TIMING DIAGRAM ........................................................................... 360
FIGURE 6 - NORMAL PROGRAMMING FOR THE CB SIMULATION .............................. 361
FIGURE 7 - CLOSE COMMAND AVAILABLE............................................................ 362
FIGURE 8 – TIME DIAGRAM ............................................................................. 363
FIGURE 9 - “AMPLIFIERS DIAGNOSTIC REPORT” PAGE ........................................... 364
FIGURE 10 – UPPER RIGHT CORNER ICON ........................................................... 365
FIGURE 11 - “CONF.” PAGE ............................................................................. 366
FIGURE 12 - “SUPPLY” PAGE............................................................................ 368
FIGURE 13 - “SUPPLY” PAGE IN CASE OF SELECTION OF A VOLTAGE FROM V1 TO V3 ... 370
FIGURE 14 - “TEMP.” PAGE ............................................................................. 372
FIGURE 15 - VOLTAGE AMPLIFIERS V1÷V3 PAGE ................................................. 373
FIGURE 16 - “MEAS.” PAGE ............................................................................ 375
FIGURE 17 - VOLTAGE AMPLIFIERS V1÷V3 ......................................................... 377
FIGURE 18 - “MANUAL MODE” PAGE ............................................................... 378
FIGURE 19 - EXAMPLE OF PREFAULT VALUES GENERATION .................................... 379
FIGURE 20 - MEASUREMENTS EXAMPLE FOR I1 TO I3 ........................................... 380
FIGURE 21 – MEASUREMENTS EXAMPLE FOR V1 TO V3 ........................................ 381
FIGURE 22 - "SETTINGS" PAGE ......................................................................... 383
FIGURE 23 - "SOFTWARE" PAGE ....................................................................... 385
FIGURE 24 - "COMMUNICATION" PAGE ............................................................. 388
FIGURE 25 - "HARDWARE CONFIGURATION" PAGE............................................... 390
FIGURE 26 - "AMPLIFIERS" PAGE ...................................................................... 392
LIST OF TABLES
TABLES
TABLE 1 - SELECTIONS OF THE PAGE “AUXILIARY SETTINGS” (1/2) .......................... 356
TABLE 2 - SELECTIONS OF THE PAGE “AUXILIARY SETTINGS” (2/2) .......................... 357
TABLE 3 - “AMPLIFIERS DIAGNOSTIC REPORT” SELECTIONS .................................... 365
TABLE 4 - CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS ........................................................... 367
TABLE 5 - COMMON PARAMETERS TO ALL CURRENT OUTPUTS ................................ 369
TABLE 6 - SPECIFIC PARAMETERS FOR EACH CURRENT OUTPUT ................................ 369
TABLE 7 - COMMON PARAMETERS TO ALL VOLTAGE OUTPUTS................................. 370
TABLE 8 - SPECIFIC PARAMETERS FOR EACH CURRENT OUTPUT ................................ 371
TABLE 9 - MEASUREMENTS DISPLAYED FOR EACH CURRENT AMPLIFIER ..................... 376
TABLE 10 - MEASUREMENTS DISPLAYED FOR EACH VOLTAGE AMPLIFIER ................... 377
TABLE 11 - SELECTIONS OF THE “SETTINGS” PAGE (1/2) ....................................... 383
TABLE 12 - SELECTIONS OF THE “SETTINGS” PAGE (2/2) ....................................... 384
TABLE 13 - ELEMENTS OF THE “SOFTWARE” SELECTIONS (1/2) .............................. 386
TABLE 14 - ELEMENTS OF THE “SOFTWARE” SELECTIONS (2/2) .............................. 387
TABLE 15 - MESSAGES OF THE COMMUNICATION SELECTION ................................. 388
TABLE 16 - ELEMENTS OF THE “SOFTWARE” SELECTIONS ....................................... 389
TABLE 17 - ELEMENTS OF THE “HARDWARE CONFIGURATION” SELECTIONS (1/2) ...... 390
TABLE 18 - ELEMENTS OF THE “HARDWARE CONFIGURATION” SELECTIONS (2/2) ...... 391
TABLE 19 - ELEMENTS OF THE “AMPLIFIERS” SELECTIONS (1/2) ............................. 392
TABLE 20 - ELEMENTS OF THE “AMPLIFIERS” SELECTIONS (2/2) ............................. 393
DRTS XX FAMILY
Chapter
CHAPTER 9 - L.C.: APPLICATION GUIDE 9

LOCAL CONTROL:
APPLICATION GUIDE

DOCUMENT No. MIE10170, Rev. 1.33, March 2015


TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 9 - L.C.: APPLICATION GUIDE ................................................ 397
1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................. 401
2 MANUAL TESTS .............................................................................. 402
2.1 REVERSE POWER RELAY TESTING......................................................... 404
2.1.1 Three phase connection....................................................... 404
2.1.2 Two phase connection ......................................................... 406
2.1.3 Better accuracy.................................................................... 408
2.2 LOSS OF POWER RELAY TESTING ......................................................... 422
2.2.1 Test execution ((P, Q) plane) ............................................... 424
2.2.2 More tests in the (P, Q) plane .............................................. 427
2.2.3 Test execution ((R, X) plane) ................................................ 432
2.2.4 More tests in the (R, X) plane .............................................. 433
3 DISTANCE ANSI 21 RELAY TESTS ..................................................... 438
3.1 DISTANCE RELAY CONNECTION ........................................................... 440
3.2 STEP 1: SET NOMINAL PARAMETERS .................................................... 443
3.3 STEP 2: CHECK TRIP TIMES AND TEST CONNECTIONS ............................... 447
3.4 STEP 3: CHECK KE ........................................................................... 449
3.5 STEP 4: CHECK RELAY SETTINGS FOR ALL FAULTS .................................... 451
3.6 STEP 5: FINAL CONSIDERATIONS ......................................................... 453
4 OVERCURRENT ANSI 50-51 RELAY TESTS ........................................ 455
4.1 OVERCURRENT RELAY CONNECTION..................................................... 456
4.2 STEP 1: SET NOMINAL PARAMETERS .................................................... 457
4.3 STEP 2: CHECK TRIP TIMES AND TESTING CONNECTIONS .......................... 465
4.4 STEP 3: CHECK RELAY SETTINGS FOR ALL FAULTS .................................... 467
4.5 STEP 4: FINAL CONSIDERATIONS ......................................................... 468
Page left intentionally blank.
1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides some relay testing application details.
The program offers three choices as follow:
• Manual Control
• Distance ANSI 21 Relays
• Overcurrent ANSI 50-51 Relays
For complex relays, as differential relays, synchrocheck relays and other for
which there is an ISA corresponding test software in TDMS, use the test set
with the PC and the related software.
For other simpler applications, proceed as follows, with a local control.
For all relays, they always have to be supplied by the auxiliary voltage, and
the trip input has to be connected.
Connect the auxiliary supply sockets to the relay inputs (if the relay is
disconnected from the plant), or leave it connected if this is the case.
Connect the relay trip output to the C and C1 input sockets. The typical case
is that the contact is voltage clean. If it is polarized, connect the auxiliary
negative to C (either coming from DRTS XX or from the plant), and the relay
trip contact to C1. It is possible to watch up to 12 contacts during the test;
remember that input contacts are six isolated groups; so, for each pair,
connect the C socket to the proper reference. If more than one trip has to
be checked, remember to enter the Binary I/O selection.
To record the test result, for further transfer to the PC and test report
printout, remember, for each relay to be tested, to fill in the Header: it is
attached to test results.
2 MANUAL TESTS
The manual selection allows testing all type of relays, but, for the most
complicated ones, it is better to use the dedicated selections or software.
To give an example, consider two types of relays:
• Reverse power relay (32)
• Loss of power relay (40)
First, consider the Setup selections. In the examples, only Shot tests are
used; assuming that the maximum trip time is less than 1 s, to avoid wasting
time when checking the no trip situation, leave the default maximum time
of 3 s.
The following image exhibits the “Setup” tab with “T max” at 3 s:

Figure 1 - "Setup" tab with “T max” at 3 s

Then, no use of the prefault voltage or currents (when testing voltage or


frequency relays, it is necessary to program the prefault voltage). It is only
necessary to enter the Prefault selection, and to set the auxiliary DC voltage.
The “Apply V DC” icon helps powering on the relay prior to tests: if the relay
has microprocessors inside, it should be powered-on some seconds before
the first test, to allow the internal diagnostics to run.
The following image exhibits the “Prefault” page:

Figure 2 - "Prefault" page


2.1 Reverse Power relay testing
Purpose of this relay is to trip when the direction of the power (sourced by
the generator) is reversed, due to a fault: the generator becomes a motor,
and sinks power.
Consider the following relay label:
• Nominal Current IN: 1 A or 5 A
• Nominal Voltage VN: usually, 100 V or 110 V (phase to phase)
• Frequency: 50 Hz or 60 Hz
• Auxiliary voltage: 48 V DC, 110 V DC, 220 V DC
Consider also the following relay setting:
• Percentage of the nominal power
• Trip delay t (s)
The relay is of the definite time delay type. To test it, it is necessary to
perform two tests. Assume the accuracy of the settings is 5%. The test is
performed injecting a power equal to P=+5%, and verifying that the relay
trips, and injecting a power equal to P=-5%, and verifying that the relay does
not trip.
These relays have a three phase current and voltage connection, or they
have two phase current and two phase to phase voltage connections (ARON
connection).

2.1.1 Three phase connection


In the first instance, the connection to the test set is straightforward:
connect the DRTS XX I1, I2, I3, IN output sockets to the corresponding relay
current inputs, and the DRTS XX V1, V2, V3, VN output sockets to the
corresponding relay voltage inputs.
The total power is:
WT = W1 + W2 + W3 = V1*I1 + V2*I2 + V3*I3
when the phase angle between V and I is zero.
The relay power setting is referred to the case when the angle is at 180°. In
this condition, a power higher than the setting causes the relay to trip in the
programmed trip time.
In the test procedure, keep the voltage equal to VN, and then modify the
current.
Consider the following case:
• IN=5 A
• VN=110 V
• P=6%
The test is performed generating, first, a value that causes the relay to trip:
 63.5


√
• Three phase voltages set at:

• Three currents set at: 5 ∙ 0.06 5%  0.315


• Angles are set at 180°:
o that is 180° for I1
o that is 180°+240°=60° for I2
o that is 180°+120°=300° for I3
The following image exhibits the “Test” tab and the related settings:

Figure 3 - "Test" tab and the related settings

and angles, modify current values as follows: 5 ∙ 0.06  5%  0.285


Press “Start”: the relay trips at the nominal time. Leaving the same voltages
Press “Start”: the relay does not trip.
With these two tests, the relay setting of 6% has been verified, with an
accuracy of 5%. Of the setting value The test is finished.
To save the result, follow the procedure explained in the Chapter 4.3.2.

2.1.2 Two phase connection


The formula to compute the total power is the following:
  12 ∙ 1 ∙ cos
12, 1 32 ∙ 3 ∙ cos
32, 3  2 ∙ √3 ∙
ϕ ∙ 
Where Vφ is the phase voltage.

is multiplied by the relay by the constant √3/2, in order to get the 3 phase
As the total power is three times the phase power Vφ*I, the measured value

power.
With the following data:
• IN=5 A
• VN=110 V
the nominal power of the relay is the following:
WT=√3*110*5=951 W
In the test procedure, keep the voltage equal to VN, then modify the current.
If P% is the threshold setting, the corresponding threshold current is the
following:
Ith=IN*P% √3/2
The following image exhibits the connection between the DRTS XX and the
relay:

Figure 4 - Connection between DRTS XX and relay

Consider the following case:


• IN=5 A
• VN=110 V
• P=6%
The nominal threshold is the following: Ith=5*0.06*√3/2=0.26 A
The test is performed generating, first, a value that causes the relay to trip:
• Two phase voltages set at: 110 V
• Two currents set at: (5*0,06*√3/2)+5%=0.272 A
• Angles are set at 180°:
o that is 180° for I1
o that is 180°+240°=60° for I2
The following image exhibits the “Test” tab with the related settings:

Figure 5 - "Test" tab with the related settings

and angles, modify current values as follows: 5 ∙ 0.06 ∙ √3/2  5%  0.246


Press “Start”: the relay trips at the nominal time. Leaving the same voltages

Press “Start”: the relay does not trip.


With these two tests, the relay setting of 6% has been verified, with an
accuracy of 5%. The test is finished.
To save the result, follow the procedure explained in the Chapter 4.3.2.

2.1.3 Better accuracy


To verify the setting in a more accurate way, reduce the tolerance around
the nominal value, and tighten the research.
To use only one phase, connect the same voltage, and multiply currents by
three (3 phase connection), or by 2 (2 phase connection). However, to
ensure that circuits are operational, repeat the test 3 or 2 times.
To test the relay characteristic curve, consider that the relay curve is a
straight line in the -P side of the (P, Q) plan; its intersection with the P axis
is -P%.
The following image exhibits the (P, Q) plane and the relay curve:

Figure 6 - (P, Q) plane

Point No. 1 is the one tested at 5% accuracy. See another way to test it,
using the Ramp test.
Select “Ramp” in the “Setup” page.
Press “Set values”.
The following image exhibits the “Values” page:

Figure 7 - "Values" page

The value for the gradient can be, roughly, 1/5 of the current setting per
second. Program the nominal relay trip time, else the result is affected by
an error (see the Ramp description for details, Chapter 5, Paragraph 2.4.3).
The following image exhibits the “Test” page, referred to the two phase
connections:

Figure 8 - "Test" page


The nominal threshold is 0.26 A. The starting current is set at about -20% of
the nominal threshold (0.2 A); the relay should trip after:
0.2+(0.26-0.2)/0.05 s=1.4 s
In the “Setup” page, the maximum time is set at 3 s: this is enough for the
test.
Press “Start”: the current increases at the pace of 0.05 A/s, and it stops as
the relay trips; the display shows the currents thresholds, and the time after
test start.
Enter in the Results table: the current thresholds and the trip delay are
visible.

Consider the point No. 2 of the characteristic curve. It is apparent that


finding it is easy, provided that changing the current angle from 180° to a
lower value, for instance 150°. Angle become as follows:
• 150° for I1
• 150°+240°=30° for I2
There is another point to consider: the value of the power at the threshold
point is increased with respect to point No. 1; so, also the current increases.
Compute the new threshold and change parameters so that the test lasts
the same time; the other way is to increase the maximum time, so that there
is enough time to find the threshold. If set Tmax=10 s, there is no further
problem to test at other angles. Note that the above applies also to the angle
of 210°.

Consider the point No. 3. It is apparent that reducing the angle down to 90°
makes the search curve rather tangent to the nominal curve. For a more
accurate measurement, it is better to fix the test power (current) to a value
of intervention; starting from 90° (270°), it is possible to increase (decrease)
the angle until the relay trips.
The following image exhibits the “Values” page for the test of point No. 3
(angles of I1 and I2 are increased, at the pace of 5°/s):

Figure 9 - "Values" page

Start the test at a current of 0.7A, and at angles of 90° and 90°+240°=330°:
values at trip are the desired thresholds. With other currents, it is possible
to find other points on the curve.
Now there is a set of results in terms of voltage, current and angles. It is
possible to compute the points of the characteristic curve applying the

! 
∙  ∙ cos"#$%&
, 
following formulas:

( 
∙  ∙ sin"#$%&
, 
Here the software can help showing the test results in the (P, Q) plane. At
the end of the test, save the result into the USB key; then, open the TDMS
software, and start the Manual program.
Select “Import from DRTS66” and open the results acquired.
The following image exhibits the TDMS page with results:
1. Select “Tests Table”
2. Click the arrows and the table goes to full screen

Figure 10 - TDMS page with results


The following image exhibits the table to full screen:

Figure 11 - Tests Table to full screen

In the table are displayed many parameters that are not of interest. To select
parameters of interest, right click with the mouse on the table.
The following image exhibits the drop-down menu, which opens with the
right click:

Figure 12 - Drop-down menu


Select “Modify Columns Layout”; the following image exhibits the
correspondent page:

Figure 13 - "Modify Columns Layout" page

The page displays to the right the parameters on the result table, and to the
left all other parameters.
Press the double arrows “<<”: all parameters go to the left; no parameter
on the table. Decide which are the parameters of interest, and move them
from the left to the right column by pressing the single arrow “>”.
The following image exhibits the desired table:

Figure 14 – “Tests Table” with desired columns

The first line is the Prefault.


The second line is the trip test at +5% of the nominal setting: the relay has
tripped in 0.2088s.
Third and fourth lines are current ramps at -30° and +30° with respect to
180°.
Fifth and sixth lines are current ramps at -60° and +60° with respect to 180°.
Seventh line is an angle ramp with current 1A starting from 90° up.
Eighth line is an angle ramp with current 1.5A starting from 90° up.
Ninth line is an angle ramp with current 1A starting from 270° down.
Tenth line is an angle ramp with current 1.5A starting from 270° down.
Eleventh line is the current ramp test at 180°.
These are the results of the test, but not in the (P, Q) coordinates.
The program allows to have P and Q computed on the base of V, I and angle:
select again “Modify Columns Layout”, and scroll the list until find the
following:
• “Active Power 1”
• “Active Power 2”
• “Reactive Power 1”
• “Reactive Power 2”
They are the parameters of interest.
The following image exhibits the “Tests Table” (after removing currents and
so on, just to simplify):

Figure 15 - "Tests Table" with columns of interest


The active power (second column), is almost the same along all tests, but it
is not enough.
To see in the table also the percentage of the power (6 %), and the
percentage error, use the definitions of Formulas.
In the “Modify Columns Layout”, select the following:
• “Formula 1”
• “Formula 2”
• “Formula 3”
• “Formula 4”
Move to the left the diagram by clicking on the left arrow, on the right part
of the screen: it opens again.
Press the button “Formulas”.
The following image exhibits the “Formulas” page:

Figure 16 - "Formulas" page

The page allows computing any value from the variables of interest: more
details in the Manual Software Instruction Manual.
After that, compute the percentage of the total active and reactive power;
the following table lists the necessary formulas:
Type of
Description Formula
Formula
Compute the total active

-
power generated during

2 ∙
1 ∙ 1 ∙ cos+ϕ1  ϕ
1, ∙
tests: add power Total active power

180
Formula 1
generated by outputs
V1, I1 to the power
generated by V2, I2
Compute the total
reactive power

-
2 ∙
1 ∙ 1 ∙ sin+ϕ1  ϕ
1,∙
generated during tests: Total reactive power

180
Formula 2 add power generated by
outputs V1, I1 to the
power generated by V2,
I2

100 ∙ 2 ∙
1 ∙ 1 ∙ cos+ϕ1  ϕ
1, ∙
-
Diagram the percentage Active power
180
of the total active power

951
Formula 3
with respect to the
nominal power of 951 W

100 ∙ 2 ∙
1 ∙ 1 ∙ cos+ϕ1  ϕ
1, ∙
-
Compute the error of Active power % error
180 6
the above percentage

951
Formula 4
with respect to the
nominal 6 %
Table 1 – Formulas
The following image exhibits the “Formulas” page with the fitting up of the
previous formulas:

Figure 17 - "Formulas" page with fitting up of formulas

Press the button “Check” to verify that it is correct.


Name all the formulas (use the “Labels” part of the page).
The following image exhibits the “Tests Table” with the new columns:

Figure 18 – “Test table” with the new columns

The power generated when the relay has tripped is equal to -6 % of the
nominal power; errors are a fraction of the percentage.
For curve in the (P, Q) coordinates, go to the TDMS page and select the
“Graph Settings” part.
The following image exhibits the “Graph Settings” selection:

Figure 19 - TDMS page

The following image exhibits the variables to be displayed on the graph:

Figure 20 - X and Y axis variables

In the first line, it is possible to name the axis.


Checking the “Show Grid” selection, it is possible to see the reference lines.
From the drop-down menu, select the variable of interest.
Select the “Advanced Graph Settings” tab and define the limits for X and Y-
axis (default values are minimum and maximum values).
The following image exhibits the “Advanced Graph Settings” tab:

Figure 21 - “Advanced Graph Settings” tab

The following image exhibits the final graph:

Figure 22 - Final graph

Dots are aligned at-57 W approximately.


The test is over.
2.2 Loss of Power
Power relay
relay testing
Purpose of this relay is to trip when the generator loses its excitation.
Consider first the relay label as follows:
• Nominal current IN: 1÷5 A
• Nominal voltage VN: usually, 100 or 110 V (phase to phase)
• Frequency: 50 or 60 Hz
• Auxiliary voltage: 48, 110 or 220 V DC
Consider the relay settings. There are two types of characteristic curves to
set this type of relay:
• characteristic curve given in the (P, Q) plane
• characteristic curve given in the (R, X) plane
The setting parameters for the (P, Q) plane are the following:
• Q0, reactive power point of intervention
• Tg(α), tangent of the characteristic curve angle
• t (s), trip delay
The task consider the first characteristic that is similar to the loss of power:
it is a straight on the (P, Q) plane (actually, the characteristic has the
coordinates Ps and Qs, where Ps and Qs are the phase active powers at the
secondary side). The difference is the position of the straight on the (P, Q)
plane.
The following image exhibits the (P, Q) plane:

Figure 23 - (P, Q) plane

The area above the straight is considered normal operation; the area below
the straight makes the relay to intervene.
Consider the characteristic curve in the (R, X) plane. Characteristic curves
and relay settings can be different, according to the type of protection.
The following image exhibits the basic characteristic curve (the parameters
are referred to the relay phase connections):

Figure 24 - (R, X) plane


The red area is the intervention area: the relay trips when the measured
impedance is inside the circle.
The alternative relay settings can be:
• Coordinates X1, X2: the characteristic is a circle
• Coordinate of the circle center O and circle diameter d
• The circle can be modified into a lens made of two arcs: in this
instance, parameters can be O and the a/b ratio of width with
respect to height
• Coordinate O and diameter d; however, the circle enters the
positive X plane, so it is limited by two straights starting from 0 and
with a specified angle with respect to the R axis
• Others

2.2.1 Test execution ((P, Q) plane)


The relay is of the definite time delay type. To test it, it is necessary to

two to check the point /0 ∙ (1


perform at least four tests:

• two to test another point, that can be 1 or 2, to verify the angle α
of the straight
Assume that the setting is correct with an accuracy of 5%.
The following table lists the characteristics of each test:

Test Description Note

(/0 ∙ (1 5%, and verifying


Inject a (reactive) power equal to
Test 1

Inject a power equal to (/0 ∙


that the relay trips

Test 2 (1  5%, and verifying that the


relay does not trip
Depend upon the point to

2 5%), and verify that the relay


Inject a (active) power equal to test. Assume it is point 2:
Test 3 compute it considering that it

2  /0 ∙ (1 ∙ tan 5
trips is equal to

Table 2 - Characteristics of each test (1/2)


Test Description Note

Inject a power equal to 2  5%,


Depend upon the point to
test. Assume it is point 2:
Test 4 and verify that the relay does not compute it considering that it

2  /0 ∙ (1 ∙ tan 5
trip is equal to

Table 3 - Characteristics of each test (2/2)

Assume that the relay has the following settings:


• IN=5 A
• VN=100 V
• Βq=0.53
• tg(α)=5.67 (α=80°)
• Trip delay=0.2 s
The following image exhibits the connection between the DRTS XX and the
relay:

Figure 25 - Connection between DRTS XX and relay


100
From the above setting, it is possible to calculate the following parameters:

/0 ∙ (1  0.53 ∙ 5 ∙  153.2
6
√3
2  /0 ∙ (1 ∙ 5.67  868 
The following table lists the first two test points for each test:

100
Test Q V I ΦI1
153.2 5%  160.86
"6  57.8

√3
Test 1 2.78 A 270°

Test 2 153.2  5%  145.54


"6 57.8 V 2.51 A 270°
Table 4 - First two test points for each test

The following table lists the last two test points for each test:
Test P V I ΦI1
Test 3 868 5%  911.4  57.8 V 15.7 A 0°

Test 4 868  5%  824.6  57.8 V 14.3 A 0°


Table 5 - Last two test points for each test

The following image exhibits the “Manual Mode/Test”Shot” page for the
Test 1:

Figure 26 - "Manual Mode/Test”Shot" page for Test 1


2.2.2 More tests in the (P, Q) plane
As with the reverse power test, it can be interesting to find more points of
the characteristic curve.
Perform a ramp tests in order to find the trip points: performing these tests
at different I1 angles, and it is possible to find as many points as desired.
Keep the following:
• -βq*QN = -153.2 VAr
• voltage = 57.8 V
• I1 phase = 270°
• Nominal current 2.65 A
Ramp the current up with the following parameters:
• start from 2 A up
• slope = 0.5 A/s
• maximum test time = 10 s
The following image exhibits the “Manual Mode/Values” page related to the
ramp:

Figure 27 - "Manual Mode/Values" page for the ramp


The following image exhibits the “Manual Mode/Test” page with the results:

Figure 28 - "Manual Mode/Test" page and results

Now perform the tests at angles of 15° starting from 270° to 360°. Call φ the
test angle, and set the formulas to compute the nominal values for the
following:
• Px
• Qx
• VAx
• Ix
To find the coordinates of the intersection point between the nominal
characteristic straight and the test straight (for instance, the point 1 of the
curve), we have to intersect the two straights.

!
The characteristic straight has the following equation:

(  /0 ∙ (1
tan 5

(  ! ∙ tan ϕ
The test straight has the following equation:
!
So, the intersection coordinates are computed from the following equation:

/0 ∙ (1  ! ∙ tan ϕ
tan 5

(1
The system equations is the following:

!9  /0 ∙
8 1
tan ϕ 
tan 5
(9  !9 ∙ tan ϕ
Besides, for the test execution, it is possible to compute the nominal current
threshold Ix and the trip delay Tx.
The system equations is the following:

=
9  >!9 (9
? ?

;
9
9 
< 57.8
; 9  @ 9
: 0.5
We transfer formulas to an Excel file to have it all computed.
The following tables are in the Excel file:

RELAY SETTINGS DERIVATIONS TEST PARAMETERS

IN [V] 5 QN 288.68 φ [V]


Vφ 57.74

VN [V] 100 βq*QN 153 Grad I1 [A/s] 0.5

βq 0.53 B 867.5 Trip time [s] 0.2

Tg(α) 5.67 Start I [A] 2


Table 6 – Tables in the excel file (1/2)
TEST DATA
Ø [deg] Px [W] Qx [Var] Vax [Vax] Ix [A] Tx [s]
270 -0.02 -153 153 2.65 1.5
285 39.12 -146.1 151.25 2.62 1.44
300 80.14 -138.86 160.33 2.78 1.75
315 130.02 -130.07 183.91 3.19 2.57
330 202.93 -117.21 234.35 4.06 4.32
345 344.2 -92.29 356.36 6.17 8.54
0 867.5 0 867.5 15.03 26.25
Table 7 - Tables in the excel file (2/2)

Test results are collected in the test results table. As with the reverse power
relay, transfer the test result to the Manual test software, and compute the

-
variables of interest with the following formulas:

ABCD& EF"G& EHI&6 


1 ∙ 1 ∙ cos JEF1  EF
1 ∙ K
180
-
L&"ABCD& EF"G& EHI&6 
1 ∙ 1 ∙ sin JEF1  EF
1 ∙ K
180
The following image exhibits the results table:

Figure 29 - Results table

The value found for βq*QN (nominal 153.2 VAr) is correct.


For the second parameter, it is possible to verify that the value for
B (nominal 868 W), is also correct.
The fact that the characteristic curve is a straight can be verified plotting the
Active phase power vs Reactive phase power curve.
The following image exhibits the test result graph:

Figure 30 - Test result graph


2.2.3 Test execution ((R, X) plane)
The relay is of the independent time delay type.
Assume that the setting is correct with an accuracy of 10%.
Test only the two intersections of the circle with the X-axis, with a go/no-go
test.
Suppose X1 and X2 have the following values:
• X1=2 Ohm
• Xx=200 Ohm
Inject Voltage and Currents with such an amplitude and phase that they
correspond to the impedance to be simulated.
Referring to the phase voltage V, the phase angle of the current is +90°.

The following formulas explain that fact:

N φ  φ
 φN
M  ⇒Q ⇒ φ  φN  90°
φ
 0
φN  φ
 φ  90°
The following table lists the tests performed:
Test Z V I [A] φI Trip
Test 1 1.8 18 10 90 No
Test 2 2.2 22 10 90 Yes
Test 3 180 63.5 0.353 90 Yes
Test 4 220 63.5 0.353 90 No
Table 8 - Tests performed

To calculate the appropriate voltage and currents, follow this procedure:


• Set the maximum voltage and current for the test:
• Vmax = 63.5 V (phase to neutral)

Calculate the current: R"9 


R"9SN
• Imax = 10 A

• If current is higher than Imax, calculate the voltage:
 N ∙ R"9
The tripping time is normally instantaneous.
The following image exhibits the “Manual Mode/Test” page:

Figure 31 - "Manual Mode/Test" page

2.2.4 More tests in the (R, X) plane


As with the (P, Q) plane tests, it is possible to find more points of the
characteristic curve. Perform ramp tests in order to find the trip points.
For the test of X1, set the I angle at 90°; then, as shown by the arrow in the
characteristic curve, start from a low impedance, for instance 0, and
increase the impedance.
Remembering that Z = V/I, to have a zero value for Z we have to set the
following:
• V=0V
• It1 = 10 A
The test is a ramp test where V starts from 0, and the nominal voltage


B  B ∙ T  10 ∙ 2  20

threshold is the following:

A ramp of 5 V/s is adequate.


For the test of X2, set the I angle at 90°; then, as shown by the arrow in the
characteristic curve, start from an high impedance, for instance infinite
(corresponding to a current equal to zero), and decrease the impedance,
which is obtained increasing the current.
Remembering that Z = V/I, to have a high value for Z, set Vt2 = 63.5 V. The


B
B?  ?ST  63.5S200  0.32
nominal current threshold is the following:

?
A ramp of 0.1 A/s is adequate.
The following image exhibits the “Manual Mode/Values” page for the point
X1 and the corresponding test result in the “Manual Mode/Test” page:

Figure 32 - "Manual Mode/Values" and “Manual Mode/test” pages

From X1 and X2 compute the following parameters:


• Circle diameter: d = X2-X1
• Coordinate of the center O: (X1+X2)/2
In the example:
• d = 200-2 = 198 Ohm
• O = (2+200)/2 = 101 Ohm
May be the relay has a lens shape, and it can be interesting to verify the a/b
ratio; or, it is a circle, and it is interesting to verify it.
Perform a circular test, as shown by the arrows, where Zt has such a value
to cross the circle at its diameter, and perform a phase gradient test, starting
from 0° and going up (point 1), or from 180° and going down (point 2), until
reaching for the intervention area.
In the example, the impedance Zt is the following:

@ ?
U
NB  V W X  141.4 VFR
?
2

B  63.5

63.5
B   0.45 
141.4

/  90°  5 H6 5  90°


If α is the angle of the first test, compute the following parameters:

@
B&GB  YB ∙ sin /
2

@S
In the example, sinβ is the following:

2  99  0.70
NB 141
/  44.5°
5  45.5° 134.5° Z6HR 180°
The rate of change of 10 °/s is adequate.
The following image exhibits the “Manual Mode/Values” (10 °/s) page for
the point 1 (for point 2 it is -10 °/s: to input the minus, key in 10 first; then,
F5 (shift) and left arrow):

Figure 33 - "Manual Mode/Values" page

It is possible to add other points by performing the test at different values


for Z (for instance, 100 Ohm and 180 Ohm): the shape would be perfectly
identified.

To diagram test results in the (R, X) plane, import test results in the Manual


1 -
test program, and compute the following formulas:

L ∙ cos Jφ1  φ
1 ∙ K
1 180

1 -
T ∙ sin Jφ1  φ
1 ∙ K
1 180
The followings image exhibits the test result table having tested X1, X2,
point 1, point 2:

Figure 34 - Result table

The following image exhibits the (R, X) graph having tested X1, X2, point 1,
point 2:

Figure 35 - (R, X) graph


3 DISTANCE ANSI 21 RELAY TESTS
Distance relays behave as follows:
• Understand that there is a fault
• Verify the type of fault: single phase to ground, two phases, three
phases, two phases to ground
• Measure the fault impedance
• Trip with a different timing, according to the fault impedance value
On the (R, X) plane, zone 1 is a surface which includes all impedances that
make the relay to trip with a delay equal to T1; the zone limit is a line that
divides two zones. Testing a zone limit always involves two tests: one in zone
A, the other one in zone A+1. Therefore, there is always an approximation
in finding a zone limit; it is the difference between the two impedances for
which:
• With fault Z(A), fault time is T(A)
• With fault Z(A+1), fault time is T(A+1)
What the software does is to compute currents, voltages, angles
corresponding to ZA and to Z(A+1); then, the test set applies the computed
values to the relay and measures the corresponding timings. The position of
the limit is actually unknown, and it is not important, provided that the
difference Z(A+1) – Z(A) is small enough, compared to the average (Z(A) +
Z(A+1))/2, that is the test result.
The following image exhibits the situation:

Figure 36 – Zone limits


The above implies that key test parameters are zone timings: if they are
wrong, test results will be meaningless. This is why, prior to start the
automatic test, we suggest to verify that timings are correct. If timings are
correct and zone limits are wrong, our test programs will automatically find
the actual limits, with search algorithms that minimize the search time.
3.1 Distance relay connection
The connection of the distance relay to the test set involves the following
minimum set of connections:
• Three voltage outputs: they are V1, V2, V3 and VN. Having six
voltage inputs, connect among them the three zero references, and
connect them to VN
• Three current outputs: they are I1, I2, I3 and IN. Having six current
inputs, connect among them the three zero references, and
connect them to IN
• One trip contact. The connection follows the type of contact: if it is
voltage free, connect one end of the contact to the C socket, and
the other one to the C1 socket. If it is with voltage, connect C to the
zero voltage reference, and C1 to the polarized contact
Other possible basic connections:
• Power supply the relay by connecting the auxiliary voltage input to
the test set V DC output
• Over-reach command. This command comes from the external
Recloser logic, and it is typically connected to the auxiliary supply.
So, connect the C socket of A1 to the supply positive, and the N.O.
socket to the over-reach relay input
The following image exhibits the connection to DRTS6 and to DRTS 66:

Figure 37 - Connection to DRTS6

Figure 38 - Connection to DRTS 66


Before continuing, consider that:
• There is no problem of the test set power when testing electronic
or numeric relays
• In case of electro-mechanical relays, the distance relays compute
the impedance, i.e. the ratio of voltage vs. current. This means that
halving both of them, it is possible to perform the test at the
expense of a moderate accuracy reduction. In this situation, if the
general starter is of the over-current type, it is mandatory to
temporarily halve the settings
3.2 Step 1: Set nominal parameters
Purpose of the test is to verify the nominal settings, which are usually
available as a setting table, or can be derived from the relay set-up software.
The table reports the following values:
• Nominal current
• Nominal voltage
• Frequency
• Auxiliary DC supply
• Trip times of the different zones: T1, T2, T3, T4, (T5)
• CT side: Line or Busbar
• Earth coefficient: KE (or an equivalent definition)
• Over-reach command: yes or no. If yes, corresponding trip time and
input logic (High = Over-reach)
Values are in Ohm on the secondary side. Values are impedances, while in
many instances, for the line angle, tables report the reactance. In this latter
case, values do not change with angles of 90° and 0°.
For other angles, transform the reactance into impedance by dividing it with

T
the sine of the angle as follows:

N
sin [
• KE given as RE/RL, XE/XL. RE/RL = 1, XE/XL = 1
• VN = 57.7. V; IN = 1 A; Frequency = 50 Hz
• Test current = 2 A
• Zone limits tolerance: 2%
• Time settings (NOTE: omit zone 3 as the reverse one,
and rename zone 4 = 3, zone 5 = 4):
Zone 1 2 3 4 Out
Time (s) 0.04 0.3 0.6 0.9 1.2 (Tmax)
• Zone settings: for phase to ground and phase to
phase faults, the following table list the parameters:
Angle/Zone 1 2 3 4
0° 1.5 2 4 6
80° 1.52 2.04 4.06 6.08
90° 1.5 2 4 6

The test of the above relay is performed as follows:


• Select Distance ANSI 21. The following image exhibits the Main
control Screen and the “Distance ANSI 21” selection:

Figure 39 - “Distance ANSI 21” selection


• Open the nominal parameters page. The following image exhibits
the “Distance ANSI 21/Setup” page:

Figure 40 - “Distance ANSI 21/Setup” page

Input the relay settings, in particular the following:


o the test current, I test (A)
o the coefficient KE, φ
o the Nominal Times
For the other parameters, usually default values are OK
• Now, press the button “Generate Prefault”: the DC voltage is
generated, and the relay powered-on. In addition, nominal
voltages are generated
• Having single phase opening commands, and desiring to check that
they match the fault, go to Binary inputs and select the Trip mode
accordingly. Having only one trip contact, select Trip mode, and
then press OK.
The following image exhibits the “Distance ANSI 21/Binary Inputs”
page:

Figure 41 - “Distance ANSI 21/Binary Inputs” page

• After this, it is possible to program immediately the border test.


3.3 Step 2: Check trip times and test connections
The following sequence of tests allows avoiding wastes of time in case some
connection or parameter is wrong:
• The first check to be performed is measuring trip times and testing
connections. To this purpose, go to Test and select Shot.
The following image exhibits the “Distance ANSI 21/Test/Shot”
page:

Figure 42 - “Distance ANSI 21/Test/Shot” page

• Now, program the following shot tests:


o Phase: 80°
o Maximum time “t Max”: the maximum delay is 0.9 s;
program twice this value
o Impedances: see the following table

Test No. 1 2 3 4 5

Z (Ohm) 1 1.7 3 5 7

DelayNom (s) 0.04 0.3 0.6 0.9 No trip


Table 9 – Shot tests to program
As it is possible to see comparing the table with the settings, tests
are performed in zones 1, 2, 3, 4, and outside.
• For each impedance, program it and then press the “+” icon: the
line is added to the test list
• Program the above values for faults L1, and then for faults L23. In
all, 10 tests have been programmed
• Press Start, and check that the test evolves correctly. At the end,
go to results, enter the results table and scroll results: trip times
must match the nominal ones. The “No trip” result is displayed as
“----“.
The following image exhibits the “Distance ANSI 21/ Results” page:

Figure 43 - “Distance ANSI 21/ Results” page

• The first test is over: move to test no. 2. It is possible to save these
results; then, delete them.
3.4 Step 3: Check KE
The second check to be performed is verifying that the earth coefficient is
correct. To this purpose, perform the tests as follows:
• Go to Test and select the test Auto Z-t. The following image exhibits
the “Distance ANSI 21/Test/Auto Z-t” page:

Figure 44 - “Distance ANSI 21/Test/Auto Z-t” page

• It is possible to verify that KE is correct by checking the first zone


setting, with fault L1. The nominal value is 1.5 Ohm; with a
tolerance of 5% it should be between 1.425 and 1.575. Verify it,
with the following values:
o Start value: 1.4 Ohm
o Step: 0.02 Ohm
o Stop: 1.6 Ohm
• Once programmed, press the “+” icon: ten tests are added to the
list
• Now, press the “Start” button, and watch time delays: at some
value of the increasing impedance, the delay changes from 40 ms
to 300 ms. As the test is finished, select the Graph, and fault L1.
The following image exhibits the “Distance ANSI 21/Graph” page:

Figure 45 - “Distance ANSI 21/Graph” page

It is possible to see that the delay changes from 40 ms to 300 ms


when the impedance reaches exactly 1.52 Ohm. The best estimate
for the first zone limit with fault L1 is therefore:
Z1 (80°) = (1.52 + 1.54)/2 = 1.53 ± 0.01 Ohm
This confirms both the KE coefficient and the first zone relay
setting.
3.5 Step 4: Check relay settings for all faults
The third check to be performed is verifying that the relay settings are
correct for all type of fault. To this purpose, perform tests as follows:
• Select the Border test. The following image exhibits the “Distance
ANSI 21/Test/Border” page:

Figure 46 - “Distance ANSI 21/Test/Border” page

• Next, select the zones t to test; in this instance, they are four. Input
the corresponding settings
• Now, important, select the zone tolerance: the border test is
performed generating faults corresponding to the nominal zone
limits plus and minus the tolerance. In this instance, the tolerance
is 2%
• The first test will be performed at 80°, and it will be phase 1 to
ground: press the “+” icon, and eight tests are added to the list
• Now, with the same parameters and angle, select L2 and confirm;
then, L3 and confirm
• Next, as relay settings are the same for phase to phase faults, still
at 80°, select also faults L12, L23, L31, L123
Now the test relay settings at 80° are completed. This accomplished, change
the angle to 90°, program the corresponding settings, and select all types of
faults. Repeat the same for 0°.
3.6 Step 5: Final considerations
As it is possible to see, as many as 168 tests have been programmed. It takes
some time, and this is why it is better to perform the preliminary tests as
follows:
• Press the “Start” button: the test is executed in less than five
minutes
• As tests are finished, go to the test result Graph and select fault L1.
The following image exhibits the “Distance ANSI 21/Graph” page:

Figure 47 - “Distance ANSI 21/Graph” page

There are two tests around each zone limit: one with the delay of the zone
at left; the other one with the delay of the zone at right. For the last zone,
at right it is possible to see a black dot, corresponding to no trip. It is possible
to see that:
• Delays match with the nominal ones
• The delay changes according to the selected zone limits
Select the other faults, and verify that the result is the same; next, change
the angle, and repeat the control until all results have been checked.
It is also possible to enter the Results table, scroll all test results and watch
the results judgment: the green check means that the test result is
correct; that is, the trip time matches the expected zone. The white cross on
a red spot marks the no trip or a wrong trip delay; in this instance, it is
possible to perform the Z-t test on that result, to verify if it was a random
relay response.

CAUTION: Do not forget saving the test result for further


exportation to the PC

The test is over.


4 OVERCURRENT ANSI 50-
50-51 RELAY TESTS
Overcurrent relays behave as follows:
• Understand that there is a fault
• Measure the fault current
• Trip with a different timing, according to the fault current (time
dependent) or trip with the fixed delay (definite time)

CAUTION: The delay does not depend upon the faulty phase
4.1 Overcurrent relay connection
The connection of the overcurrent relay to the test set involves the following
minimum set of connections:
• Three current outputs: they are I1, I2, I3 and IN. Having six current
inputs, connect among them the three zero references, and
connect them to IN
• One trip contact. The connection follows the type of contact: if it is
voltage free, connect one end of the contact to the C socket, and
the other one to the C1 socket. If it is with voltage, connect C to the
zero voltage reference, and C1 to the polarized contact
The following image exhibits the connection between the DRTS XX and the
relay:

Figure 48 - Connection between DRTS XX and relay

• Power supply the relay, by connecting the auxiliary voltage input to


the test set V DC output
4.2 Step 1: Set nominal parameters
Purpose of the test is to verify the nominal relay settings, which are usually
available in the setting table, or can be derived from the relay set-up
software.
• IN = 1 A
• Frequency = 50 Hz
• DC Voltage auxiliary supply: 110 V
• The characteristic curve is made of three steps: the
first one is time dependent; the other two are
definite time
• Time dependent curve settings:
• IEC very inverse
• I> = 100% IN (1 pu; 1 A)
• TD = 1 s
• First definite time:
• I>> = 760% IN (7.6 pu; 7.6 A)
• t>> = 200 ms
• Second definite time:
• I>>> = 1000% IN (10 pu; 10 A)
• t>>> = 40 ms
• Time tolerance: 5%
• Threshold tolerance: 2%
The test of the above relay is performed as follows:
• Select Overcurrent ANSI 50-51. The following image exhibits the
Main Control Screen and the “Overcurrent ANSI 50-51” selection:

Figure 49 - “Overcurrent ANSI 50-51” selection

• Open the nominal parameters page, and input the first relay
settings:
• the nominal current, I nom (A)
• the maximum current, I max (A)
• the DC supply, V DC (V)
• the tolerances, max %
The following image exhibits the “Overcurrent ANSI 50-51/Setup”
page:

Figure 50 - “Overcurrent ANSI 50-51/Setup” page

For the other parameters, usually default values are OK. For the
maximum current, program a value greater than the greater relay
threshold. In this instance, as the maximum setting is 10 A, program
15 A
• Having single phase opening commands, and desiring to check that
they match the fault, go to Binary inputs and select the Trip mode
accordingly. Having only one trip contact, select Trip mode, and
then press OK.
The following image exhibits the “Overcurrent ANSI 50-51/Binary
Inputs” page:

Figure 51 - “Overcurrent ANSI 50-51/Binary Inputs” page

• Now, press “Nominal Char” in the “Setup” page: the relay settings
input have to be completed. Move to the setting table and press
enter. Remove the default definition pressing the SHIFT and DEL
buttons: the page is blank, as follow:
Figure 52 - “Overcurrent ANSI 50-51/Setup/Nominal Char” page
• Now input the relay settings, as follows:
• Press the “Add 50-51 element” button: the following
image exhibits the related page:

Figure 53 - “Add 50-51 element” page: first selection

• Input I/IN = 1
• Select “IEC Class B (Very Inverse)
• Input the corresponding parameters: I/IN = 1; TD = 1 s
• Press OK: the element has been added. The program
comes back to the setting page
• Press again “Add 50-51 element” and select definite time.
The following image exhibits the related page:

Figure 54 - “Add 50-51 element” page: second selection

• Input the corresponding parameters: I/IN = 7.6; TD =


200 ms
• Press OK: the definite time element has been added. The
program comes back to the setting page
• Press again “Add 50-51 element” and select definite time
• Input the last parameters: I/IN = 10; TD = 40 ms
• Press OK: the element has been added. The program
comes back to the setting page.
The following image exhibits the “Overcurrent ANSI 50-
51/Setup/Nominal Char” page after previous selections:

Figure 55 - “Overcurrent ANSI 50-51/Setup/Nominal Char” page

• Press the “return” icon : the relay setting is completed


• Now, press Generate Prefault: the DC voltage is generated, and the
relay powered-on
This performed, it is possible to program immediately the Auto I-t test.
4.3 Step 2: Check trip times and testing connections
However, it is better to perform some Shot test, to check trip times and
testing connections. To this purpose, perform the test as follows:
• Go to the “Test” page and select “Shot”. The following image
exhibits the “Overcurrent ANSI 50-51/Test/Shot” page:

Figure 56 - “Overcurrent ANSI 50-51/Test/Shot” page

• Now, the following table lists the shot tests to program:


TEST No. 1 2 3
I (A) 5 8 11
DelayNom (s) 3.5 0.2 0.04
Table 10 - Shot tests to program

• For each current, program it and then press the”+” icon: the line is
added to the test list
• Program the above values for faults L1, and then for faults L2 and
L3
• Press the button “Start”: as the test is finished, select the “Graph”
page. The following image exhibits the “Overcurrent ANSI 50-
51/Graph” page:

Figure 57 - “Overcurrent ANSI 50-51/Graph” page

• It is possible to see immediately if trip times are correct. Verify for


each fault type. With this, also the connections are correct
• The first test is over: let us move to test no. 2. Keep these results.
4.4 Step 3: Check relay settings for all faults
The second check to be performed is verifying that the relay settings are
correct. To this purpose, perform the tests as follows:
• Select the Auto I-t test. The following image exhibits the
“Overcurrent ANSI 50-51/Test/Auto I-t” page:

Figure 58 - “Overcurrent ANSI 50-51/Test/Auto I-t” page

• It is possible to verify that the relay setting is correct by performing


a number of time tests, with fault L1.Program the following:
• Start value: 1.2 A
• Step: 0.2 A
• Stop: 11 A
• Program 60 s for the value of t Max: at 1.2 A, the delay is very long
• Once programmed, press the “+” icon: 58 tests are added to the
list. With this programming, it is possible to verify all thresholds
(including the first one) with an accuracy of 0.2 A
4.5 Step 4: Final considerations
As it possible to see, many tests have been programmed: it takes some time,
and this is why it is better to perform the preliminary tests. However, it is
not necessary to repeat the same for faults L2 and L3: the trip element is the
same for all faults; the preliminary performed tests are enough.
• Now, press the “Start” button: the test lasts about three minutes.
The following image exhibits the “Overcurrent ANSI 50-51/Graph
page” after the tests execution:

Figure 59 - “Overcurrent ANSI 50-51/Graph” page

It is possible to see that:


• Delays match with the nominal ones
• The delay changes from time dependent to 200 ms when
the current reaches around 7.6 A
• The delay changes from 200 ms to 40 ms when the current
reaches 10 A
The accuracy of the time and of the threshold test results can be investigates
looking at the Results table. The final action to do now is to enter the table,
scroll all test results and watch the results judgment: the green check
means that the test result is correct; that is, the trip time matches the
nominal one. Otherwise, the white cross on a red spot marks a wrong
trip delay; this may occur around the thresholds.

CAUTION: Do not forget saving the test result for further


exportation to the PC

The test is over.


Page left intentionally balnk.
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1 - "SETUP" TAB WITH “T MAX” AT 3 S ................................................... 402
FIGURE 2 - "PREFAULT" PAGE .......................................................................... 403
FIGURE 3 - "TEST" TAB AND THE RELATED SETTINGS.............................................. 405
FIGURE 4 - CONNECTION BETWEEN DRTS XX AND RELAY ...................................... 407
FIGURE 5 - "TEST" TAB WITH THE RELATED SETTINGS ............................................ 408
FIGURE 6 - (P, Q) PLANE ................................................................................. 409
FIGURE 7 - "VALUES" PAGE ............................................................................. 410
FIGURE 8 - "TEST" PAGE ................................................................................. 410
FIGURE 9 - "VALUES" PAGE ............................................................................. 412
FIGURE 10 - TDMS PAGE WITH RESULTS............................................................ 413
FIGURE 11 - TESTS TABLE TO FULL SCREEN.......................................................... 414
FIGURE 12 - DROP-DOWN MENU...................................................................... 414
FIGURE 13 - "MODIFY COLUMNS LAYOUT" PAGE................................................. 415
FIGURE 14 – “TESTS TABLE” WITH DESIRED COLUMNS .......................................... 415
FIGURE 15 - "TESTS TABLE" WITH COLUMNS OF INTEREST ..................................... 416
FIGURE 16 - "FORMULAS" PAGE ....................................................................... 417
FIGURE 17 - "FORMULAS" PAGE WITH FITTING UP OF FORMULAS ............................ 419
FIGURE 18 – “TEST TABLE” WITH THE NEW COLUMNS........................................... 419
FIGURE 19 - TDMS PAGE ............................................................................... 420
FIGURE 20 - X AND Y AXIS VARIABLES ................................................................ 420
FIGURE 21 - “ADVANCED GRAPH SETTINGS” TAB................................................. 421
FIGURE 22 - FINAL GRAPH ............................................................................... 421
FIGURE 23 - (P, Q) PLANE ............................................................................... 423
FIGURE 24 - (R, X) PLANE ............................................................................... 423
FIGURE 25 - CONNECTION BETWEEN DRTS XX AND RELAY .................................... 425
FIGURE 26 - "MANUAL MODE/TEST”SHOT" PAGE FOR TEST 1 .............................. 426
FIGURE 27 - "MANUAL MODE/VALUES" PAGE FOR THE RAMP ............................... 427
FIGURE 28 - "MANUAL MODE/TEST" PAGE AND RESULTS ..................................... 428
FIGURE 29 - RESULTS TABLE ............................................................................ 431
FIGURE 30 - TEST RESULT GRAPH ...................................................................... 431
FIGURE 31 - "MANUAL MODE/TEST" PAGE........................................................ 433
FIGURE 32 - "MANUAL MODE/VALUES" AND “MANUAL MODE/TEST” PAGES.......... 434
FIGURE 33 - "MANUAL MODE/VALUES" PAGE.................................................... 436
FIGURE 34 - RESULT TABLE .............................................................................. 437
FIGURE 35 - (R, X) GRAPH .............................................................................. 437
FIGURE 36 – ZONE LIMITS ............................................................................... 438
FIGURE 37 - CONNECTION TO DRTS6 ............................................................... 441
FIGURE 38 - CONNECTION TO DRTS 66 ............................................................ 441
FIGURE 39 - “DISTANCE ANSI 21” SELECTION .................................................... 444
FIGURE 40 - “DISTANCE ANSI 21/SETUP” PAGE ................................................. 445
FIGURE 41 - “DISTANCE ANSI 21/BINARY INPUTS” PAGE ..................................... 446
FIGURE 42 - “DISTANCE ANSI 21/TEST/SHOT” PAGE .......................................... 447
FIGURE 43 - “DISTANCE ANSI 21/ RESULTS” PAGE ............................................. 448
FIGURE 44 - “DISTANCE ANSI 21/TEST/AUTO Z-T” PAGE .................................... 449
FIGURE 45 - “DISTANCE ANSI 21/GRAPH” PAGE ................................................ 450
FIGURE 46 - “DISTANCE ANSI 21/TEST/BORDER” PAGE ...................................... 451
FIGURE 47 - “DISTANCE ANSI 21/GRAPH” PAGE ................................................ 453
FIGURE 48 - CONNECTION BETWEEN DRTS XX AND RELAY .................................... 456
FIGURE 49 - “OVERCURRENT ANSI 50-51” SELECTION ........................................ 458
FIGURE 50 - “OVERCURRENT ANSI 50-51/SETUP” PAGE ..................................... 459
FIGURE 51 - “OVERCURRENT ANSI 50-51/BINARY INPUTS” PAGE ......................... 460
FIGURE 52 - “OVERCURRENT ANSI 50-51/SETUP/NOMINAL CHAR” PAGE .............. 461
FIGURE 53 - “ADD 50-51 ELEMENT” PAGE: FIRST SELECTION ................................. 462
FIGURE 54 - “ADD 50-51 ELEMENT” PAGE: SECOND SELECTION ............................. 463
FIGURE 55 - “OVERCURRENT ANSI 50-51/SETUP/NOMINAL CHAR” PAGE .............. 464
FIGURE 56 - “OVERCURRENT ANSI 50-51/TEST/SHOT” PAGE .............................. 465
FIGURE 57 - “OVERCURRENT ANSI 50-51/GRAPH” PAGE .................................... 466
FIGURE 58 - “OVERCURRENT ANSI 50-51/TEST/AUTO I-T” PAGE ......................... 467
FIGURE 59 - “OVERCURRENT ANSI 50-51/GRAPH” PAGE .................................... 468
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE 1 – FORMULAS .................................................................................... 418
TABLE 2 - CHARACTERISTICS OF EACH TEST (1/2) ................................................. 424
TABLE 3 - CHARACTERISTICS OF EACH TEST (2/2) ................................................. 425
TABLE 4 - FIRST TWO TEST POINTS FOR EACH TEST ................................................ 426
TABLE 5 - LAST TWO TEST POINTS FOR EACH TEST ................................................. 426
TABLE 6 – TABLES IN THE EXCEL FILE (1/2) ......................................................... 429
TABLE 7 - TABLES IN THE EXCEL FILE (2/2) .......................................................... 430
TABLE 8 - TESTS PERFORMED ........................................................................... 432
TABLE 9 – SHOT TESTS TO PROGRAM ................................................................. 447
TABLE 10 - SHOT TESTS TO PROGRAM ................................................................ 465
Page left intentionally blank.
DRTS XX FAMILY
APPENDIX

DOCUMENT No. MIE10170, Rev. 1.33, March 2015


TABLE OF CONTENTS
APPENDIX I: CONNECTOR PINOUT .................................................................... 479
APPENDIX II: CABLE FROM DRTS XX TO BOOSTERS ........................................... 481
APPENDIX III: DRTS XX SPARE PARTS ................................................................ 482
APPENDIX IV: EARTH FACTOR FORMULAS ......................................................... 483
APPENDIX V: ARC RESISTANCE .......................................................................... 485
APPENDIX VI: FAULT CALCULATION .................................................................. 487
APPENDIX VII: OVERCURRENT RELAY CHARACTERISTIC CURVES ....................... 490
APPENDIX VIII: INTERNET ADDRESSES DEFINITION............................................ 495
APPENDIX IX: ISA INSTRUMENT RETURN FORM ................................................ 497
APPENDIX X: CALIBRATION ............................................................................... 499
APPENDIX XI: IEC61850 CERTIFICATES ............................................................... 501
REVISION INDEX ............................................................................................... 509
Page left intentionally blank.
APPENDIX I: CONNECTOR PINOUT
On connection pins provided it is possible to crimp wires with AWG size 24.

The following table lists the connections:

PIN Signal Dest. Note PIN Signal Dest. Note


1 AN_OUT1 V1 17 NC
2 AN_OUT4 I1 18 OUT_CH1 A5
3 AN_OUT2 V2 19 OUT_CH2 A6
4 GND_AN 20 OUT_CH3 A7
5 GND_AN 21 OUT_CH4 A8
6 GND_AN 22 BO_CR2
7 AN_OUT5 I2 23 BO_O1
8 GND_AN 24 BO_CR1
9 GND_AN 25 GND_LOG
10 AN_OUT3 V3 26 BO_RX_B
11 AN_OUT6 I3 27 BO_RX_A
12 GND_AN 28 GND_LOG
13 GND_AN 29 BO_CYCLE_B
14 GND_LOG 30 BO_CYCLE_A
15 TEST 31 BO_TX_B
16 CYCLE 32 BO_TX_A
Table 1 - Connections

Legend
Connection of
Connection of Connection to
auxiliary TTL
low level signals boosters
outputs
Table 2 - Legend
The following image exhibits the front view of the external amplifier
connector:

Figure 1 - Amplifier connector: frontal view


APPENDIX II: CABLE FROM DRTS XX TO BOOSTERS
This cable connects DRTS XX to all boosters.
DRTS XX side: male pins.
Booster side: male pins.
Zero power and digital signals are not connected.
The following table lists the connections:

PIN DRTS XX Booster PIN DRTS XX Booster Note


1 AN_OUT1 NC 17 NC NC
2 AN_OUT4 NC 18 OUT_CH1 NC
3 AN_OUT2 NC 19 OUT_CH2 NC
4 GND_AN NC 20 OUT_CH3 NC
5 GND_AN NC 21 OUT_CH4 NC
6 GND_AN NC 22 BO_CR2 CYCLE
7 AN_OUT5 NC 23 BO_O1 NC
8 GND_AN NC 24 BO_CR1 TEST
9 GND_AN NC 25 GND_LOG GND_LOG
10 AN_OUT3 NC 26 BO_RX_B BO_TXB
11 AN_OUT6 NC 27 BO_RX_A BO_TXA
12 GND_AN NC 28 GND_LOG GND_LOG
13 GND_AN NC 29 BO_CYCLE_B LDAC_B
14 GND_LOG GND_LOG 30 BO_CYCLE_A LDAC_A
15 TEST BO_TR1 31 BO_TX_B BO_RXB
16 CYCLE BO_CR2 32 BO_TX_A BO_RXA
Table 3 - Connections

Legend Connection to boosters


Table 4 - Legend
APPENDIX III: DRTS XX SPARE PARTS
The following table lists the suggested spare parts:
No. Description Code
1 AMCO 66 ASSEMBLY YWA11472 + YWA11475
2 AMTE 66 ASSEMBLY YWA11474 + YWA11475
Table 5 - Suggested spare parts
APPENDIX IV: EARTH FACTOR FORMULAS


The Earth Factor is normally defined as the following:
 

 
 
 3
Where
ZN = Neutral impedance
ZL = Line impedance
Z0 = Impedance of zero sequence
Sometimes the earth factor is defined in a different way.

 
A. General Electric
For GE relays like DLP, TLS1b, ALPS, D60, etc. the zero sequence factor 


is given instead of KE. Since having to enter KE, in order to get it from K0,

 3  
it is necessary to apply the following:

 
    1
 3
 


1
Therefore, the Earth Factor is the following:

 

3
The difference is evidenced by the normal values:
• KE is a value normally between 0.5 and 1.6
• KO is a value between 3 and 5
ZE=8 Ohm
ZL=12 Ohm
=> KE=8/12=0.667
=> K0=(3*8+12)/12=3
And (K0-1)/3=(3-1)/3=0.667
B. Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories


The Earth Factor is defined as follows:
 

 
 
 3
On SEL321, this is called KO1M and KOM, respectively for zone 1 and for
zones 2, 3 and 4. Just pay attention that this is not the same zero sequence
factor as per GE relays and it is not possible to change the value for ISA
program.

C. Mitsubishi relays
For MDT-H relay, they call it KN, but it is the same of K0 of GE. At the end, the


1
Earth Factor is the following:

 

3
For MDT-F relay two parameters, KRN and KXN are defined. The meaning of

  
1
these parameters is the following:

  → 
  3
  
1
  → 
  3
Therefore, it is necessary to treat them as the Siemens relays 7SA511 or 513,
but use the recalculated values as per the GE relays.

D. ABB relays
For most of the relays (RAZOA, RAZFE, LZ92, LZ96, REL316, etc.) there is not
any specific problem. For REL511 the user must provide R1and R0, X1 and
X0, and then calculate the KE for each individual zone as follows:
1 
   
 
 
3   

 
  tan
tan

 
APPENDIX V: ARC RESISTANCE

Ground Fault:  !  "    #  " ∙ 1     #


The fault impedance measured by the relay is as follows:

• Phase to Phase Fault:  !  2"  #
The following image exhibits the electric scheme:

Figure 2 - Electric scheme

The following image exhibits the representation in the vector space:

Figure 3 - Vector space representation


For relays like ALSTOM P441, P442, P444; SEL 311, 321, 421, and others, the
setting is given in terms of the following:
• Impedance reach Z1 at line angle
• Arc resistance compensation RA1
For any measured impedance value ZF, the following are valid:
• The relay extracts the arc resistance RA
• The relay calculates ZL
• The relay compares it with the setting Z1 and RA1
The described method seems to be very simple. However, when V and I must
be generated starting from a certain ZF coming from the graph, things are a
bit different.
The known parameters are:
 The fault from the graph: ZF, phZF, and therefore RF and XF
 The line angle: phZL
 The Earth Factor: KE and phKE

  "    #  " ∙ 1     #
To calculate V and I, it is necessary to get the Ground Fault:
!

Therefore, it is necessary to extract the two elements ZD and RA having RF

&
and XF:

" 
sin &
"  " ∙ cos &
"  " ∙ sin &
Once RD and XD are calculated, the arc resistance is easily calculated as
follows:
RA=RF-RD

+  ," ∙ 1     # - ∙ .
Then:
APPENDIX VI: FAULT CALCULATION
Some explanation about the calculation performed by the program.

A. Phase to Ground Fault

+   ∙ ./01/ ∙ 1   
In case of phase 1 to ground fault, the computation formula is the following:

All values are scalar. The program computes the following:


• V1: the angle is left unchanged
• V2 and V3 do not change
• I1=Itest in module (the phase is fault impedance angle changed in
sign)
• I2=I3=0

If V1>Vn, the value of the fault current is reduced to 0.9Itest, so that the test
can continue.
The following image exhibits the vector diagram:

Figure 4 - Phase to Ground Fault: Vector diagram


B. Phase to Phase Fault

+   ∙ .2345/ ∙ 2
In case of phase 1 to phase 2 fault, the computation formula is the following:

Where V21 is the module of phase-to-phase voltage, V2-V1.


From this voltage, the program computes the following:
89:  
Voltages V1, V2 =67 ;  7 <; , and the corresponding angles
8
 

• V3 is unchanged in amplitude and phase
• Current I1 is equal to Ig in module, and is phase shifted by the
impedance argument plus 180° with respect to the phase to phase
voltage V2-V1
• Current I2 is equal and opposite to I1
• I3 is equal to 0
The following image exhibits the vector diagram:

Figure 5 - Phase-to-Phase Fault: Vector diagram

C. Three Phase Fault


In case of three-phase fault, computation formula is the following:
V1=V2=V3=Z∙Ifault
The program computes the following:
• V1, V2, V3: angles are left unchanged
• I1 = I2 = I3 = Ifault in module; the phase shift is the fault impedance
argument changed in sign
The following image exhibits the vector diagram:

Figure 6 - Three Phase Fault: Vector diagram


APPENDIX VII: OVERCURRENT RELAY CHARACTERISTIC
CHARACTERISTIC CURVES
Time dependent characteristic curves can be set in two ways, TD or T(10I>),
according to the relay type as follow:
• TD: this is the time multiplier, or Time Dial, used by the computing
formulas
• Alternatively to TD, some relays characteristic may be expressed as
a function of T(10I>), which is the trip time delay at 10 times the
Pick-up Current. The user can enter either the TD or the T(10I>).
The program will recalculate the other value accordingly
With definite time relays, the parameter is T: this is the trip time.
CAUTION: The graphical representation is in per unit of the
smaller pick-up having set in the table. This is what it is
possible to call the general pick up of the relay: I> (also called
IR)
In the example, the smaller pick up is 0.5xIN. Supposing:
• IN = 1 A
• the pick-up of curve #1 is 0.5A
So I> = 0.5 A
This is why all diagrams have the starting value of the curve
equal to 1
A. IEC and IEEE standards
The curves correspond to the following formula:

C D J
=>  ?@ ∙ B  G I
B . F I
A7.E ;
1 H
Constants of the formula change according to the type of curve.
The following table lists the constants:
Standard a b c
IEC Class A Standard Inverse 0.14 0.02 0
IEC Class B Very Inverse 13.5 1 0
IEC Class C Extremely Inverse 80 2 0
IEC Long Time Inverse 120 1 0
IEC Short Time Inverse 0.05 0.04 0

IEEE - US Moderately Inverse 0.0515 0.02 0.114


IEEE - US Very Inverse 19.61 2 0.491
IEEE - US Extremely Inverse 28.2 2 0.1217
IEEE – US Normal Inverse 29.75 2 0.9
IEEE - US Short Inverse 0.0171 0.02 0.0131
Table 6 - IEC and IEEE standards: constants
B. IAC and ANSI standards
The different curves correspond to the following formula:

D L M
=>  ?@ ∙ KD    NO
.
7
G; 7 .
G; 7
.

G;
.E .E .E
Constants of the formula change according to the type of curve.
The following table lists the constants:
Standard a b c d e
IAC Inverse 0.207 0.863 0.8 -0.418 0.194
IAC Short Time Inverse 0.042 0.060 0.62 -0.001 0.022
IAC Long Time Inverse 80 0 2 2 2
IAC Very Inverse 0.09 0.795 0.1 -1.285 7.958
IEC Extremely Inverse 0.004 0.637 0.62 1.787 0.246

ANSI - Extremely Inverse 0.04 0.229 0.5 3.009 0.722


ANSI - Very Inverse 0.061 0.799 0.34 -0.284 4.050
ANSI - Normal Inverse 0.027 2.261 0.3 -4.189 9.127
ANSI-Moderately Inverse 0.173 0.679 0.8 -0.08 0.127
Table 7 - IAC and ANSI standards: constants

C. US Standards
The different curves correspond to the following formula:

Q
=>  ?@ ∙ KP  O
. R
7 ;
1
.E
Constants of the formula change according to the type of curve.
The following table lists the constants:
Standard A B C
US Moderately Inverse 0.022 0.0104 0.02
US Inverse 0.18 5.95 2
US Very Inverse 0.096 3.88 2
US Extremely Inverse 0.035 5.67 2
Table 8 - US Standards: constants

D. ANSI 37.112 Standards


The different curves correspond to the following formula:

Q 14?@
5
=>  ?@ ∙ KP  O∙
. R 9
7 ;
1
.E
Constants of the formula change according to the type of curve.
The following table lists the constants:
Standard A B C
Extremely Inverse 0.0250 6.407 2
Very Inverse 0.0712 2.855 2
Inverse 0.0185 0.0086 0.02
Moderately Inverse 0.0037 0.00172 0.02

Inverse Short Time 0.0050 1.281 2


Extremely Inverse Short Time 0.2500 64.07 2
Very Inverse Short Time 0.0712 28.55 2
Inverse Long Time 0.0352 0.086 0.02
Table 9 - ANSI 37.112 Standards: constants
E. ANSI/IEEE Standards
The different curves correspond to the following formula:

Q
=>  ?@ ∙ KP  O
. R
7 ;
1
.E
Constants of the formula change according to the type of curve.
The following table lists the constants:
Standard B C A
Inverse 8.9341 2.0938 0.17966
Short Inverse 0.2663 1.2969 0.03393
Long Inverse 5.6143 1 2.18592
Moderately Inverse 0.0103 0.02 0.0228
Very Inverse 3.922 2 0.0982
Extremely Inverse 5.64 2 0.02434
Definite Inverse 0.4797 1.5625 0.21359
Table 10 - ANSI/IEEE Standards: constants
APPENDIX VIII: INTERNET ADDRESSES DEFINITION
DEFINITION
IP ADDRESS
Each device (computer, printer, etc.), connected to a network has its own
equivalent of a phone number.
For the TCP/IP protocol, this unique address code is made by four numbers
each one between 0 and 255.
The IP address can be public or private. The Internet Assigned Numbers
Authority (IANA), a once-autonomous organization, now works within the
purview of the Internet Corporation for Assigned Names and Numbers
(ICANN). IANA is responsible for overseeing global allocation of public IP
numbers.
Within the range of publicly available IP addresses are specific, excluded
ranges withheld for private network use. These private IP ranges are as
follows:
• CLASS A: 10.0.0.0 … 10.255.255.255
• CLASS B: 172.16.0.0 … 172.31.255.255
• CLASS C: 192.168.0.0 … 192.168.255.255
Names, such as "www.isatest.com" actually map to a public IP address, such
as "88.149.156.10".
Computers within a private network are each assigned a unique private
address in order to exchange files and share resources with one another.
The network router or switch, which routes information, will pass data back
and forth among the connected computers, using the respective addresses.
The IP address (both private than public) must be unique to each device is
the same network and can either be configured dynamically (from a network
server) (Enabled DHCP) or statically (by an administrator) (Disable DHCP).
GATEWAY ADDRESS
This is the unique IP address of the network node (normally a router) that
interface the device to another network (normally the Internet). In most
cases the router is dial-up with your Internet Service Provider, that assigns
it a dynamic public IP address and allows all devices in the same network to
navigate to the Internet.

SUBNET MASK
The subnet mask is the way of telling to a device connected to a network
what network addresses can be consider local and what network are
remote. The process of sub-netting is the division of a computer network
into groups of computers that have a common, designated IP address
routing prefix
IP addresses can be broken down into what are called "classes". Classes are
kind of like area codes.
Within each block, though it is still desirable to "subdivide" that network
into smaller logical groups. For example a class-A network can have 16
million addresses.
Each network administrator who has been assigned a range of IP addresses
is free to create their own subnets and to define how large they are. The
subnet mask defines how big a part of the internet address is to be used as
the subnet number.
To understand how the subnet mask works, the IP address must be
considered in binary. For example, the subnet mask [255.255.128.0] in
binary is the following:
[11111111 11111111 10000000 00000000]
The mask's binary digits are set to 1 to indicate the positions of an internet
address that define the network prefix (that is the contiguous group of high-
order bits that are common among all hosts within a network). Conversely,
it is set to zero for that portion of the address that defines the specific device
on that subnet (Host identifier).
All hosts within the same subnet can be reached in one routing hop, implying
that all hosts in a subnet are connected to the same link.
APPENDIX IX: ISA INSTRUMENT RETURN FORM
FORM

Date
Agent
Country
Type of instrument
Serial No.
Instrument returned for:
Calibration ☐ Repair ☐
In case of repair, please specify the following:
Date of fault
Reported by e-Mail,
phone
Company
User’s reference

Fault description
How did it occur

Local analysis or
attempts to repair

Recommendations
and Notes
APPENDIX X: CALIBRATION
The calibration procedure consist in the verification of generation and
measurement sections of the test set, by comparison with external
reference instruments, which are verified on periodical basis by external
accredited labs.
For generation a value is set on the test set and measured both internally
and externally with a reference meter.
Using a dedicated calibration SW, some coefficient can be adjusted by the
operator in a way to align the generated value and the measured ones to
the unit specifications.
It is an iterative process, which is repeated for every input and output.
Each function has different ranges to verify and for every range, there are
several points of calibration, which ensures the linearity of the whole range.
Similarly for the measurement sections, a known signal in generated from a
reference instrument and the coefficient are adjusted in a way to align
generated and measured values to the unit specifications.
Calibration is performed in lab environment under controlled conditions and
reference loads.
Duration and stability of the calibration may vary with temperature,
environment, and usage conditions.
The calibration certificate ensures that test set performances are as
described in the technical specifications.
The ISA Calibration Certificate is valid for 1 year from the issued date. After
this period, the unit must be verified in term of accuracy and repeatability,
with an appropriate validation process, at ISA factory or at ISA accredited
Service Center.
ISA guarantees that calibration tests are performed in following conditions:
• Ambient temperature: +15 °C/+25 °C
• Relative humidity: 25%÷70%
• Turn on time of instrument before calibrations:
o >1h Frequency of measurements: 45 Hz to 65 Hz
o Set Value: between 30% and 75% of range of setting
(excluding auto-ranging mode)
o Load applied: according with the technical specifications
for guaranteed values
Customers can verify the calibration values, using “appropriate Sample
References” and in the above conditions.
Customers must be aware of consequential damages of the unit as follows:
• Suspicion/indication of mishandling and bad storage
• Suspicion/indication of overload (currents or voltages)
• Thermal shock: rapid change in temperature conditions (i.e. -25 °C
/+40 °C)
• Humidity shock: rapid change in humidity conditions (i.e.
40%÷85%)
• Electrical shock: electric fault in substation or external event
• Suspicion/indication of reverse-supply on voltage and/or current
outputs
• Heavy duty cycles (exceeding what indicated in the test set
specifications)
• Misuse of the device, without following the user manual
instructions or proper training
If one or more of the above circumstances happened, the ISA calibration
period automatically expires and ISA recommends to immediately
recalibrating the unit.
APPENDIX XI: IEC61850 CERTIFICATES
The following image exhibits the IEC61850-8 certificate:

Figure 7 - IEC61850-8 option certificate (1/2)


Figure 8 - IEC61850-8 option certificate (2/2)
The following image exhibits the IEC61850-8 certificate, Level A:

Figure 9 - IEC61850-8 option certificate, Level A (1/2)


Figure 10 - IEC61850-8 option certificate, Level A (2/2)
The following image exhibits the IEC61850-9 certificate:

Figure 11 - IEC61850-9 option certificate (1/2)


Figure 12 - IEC61850-9 option certificate (2/2)
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1 - AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR: FRONTAL VIEW.............................................. 480
FIGURE 2 - ELECTRIC SCHEME ........................................................................... 485
FIGURE 3 - VECTOR SPACE REPRESENTATION ....................................................... 485
FIGURE 4 - PHASE TO GROUND FAULT: VECTOR DIAGRAM ..................................... 487
FIGURE 5 - PHASE-TO-PHASE FAULT: VECTOR DIAGRAM ....................................... 488
FIGURE 6 - THREE PHASE FAULT: VECTOR DIAGRAM ............................................. 489
FIGURE 7 - IEC61850-8 OPTION CERTIFICATE (1/2) ............................................ 501
FIGURE 8 - IEC61850-8 OPTION CERTIFICATE (2/2) ............................................ 502
FIGURE 9 - IEC61850-8 OPTION CERTIFICATE, LEVEL A (1/2) ............................... 503
FIGURE 10 - IEC61850-8 OPTION CERTIFICATE, LEVEL A (2/2) ............................. 504
FIGURE 11 - IEC61850-9 OPTION CERTIFICATE (1/2) .......................................... 505
FIGURE 12 - IEC61850-9 OPTION CERTIFICATE (2/2) .......................................... 506
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE 1 - CONNECTIONS ................................................................................. 479
TABLE 2 - LEGEND.......................................................................................... 479
TABLE 3 - CONNECTIONS ................................................................................. 481
TABLE 4 - LEGEND.......................................................................................... 481
TABLE 5 - SUGGESTED SPARE PARTS................................................................... 482
TABLE 6 - IEC AND IEEE STANDARDS: CONSTANTS ............................................... 491
TABLE 7 - IAC AND ANSI STANDARDS: CONSTANTS .............................................. 492
TABLE 8 - US STANDARDS: CONSTANTS.............................................................. 493
TABLE 9 - ANSI 37.112 STANDARDS: CONSTANTS .............................................. 493
TABLE 10 - ANSI/IEEE STANDARDS: CONSTANTS ................................................ 494
TABLE 11 - REVISION INDEX............................................................................. 509
REVISION INDEX
The following table lists the revisions of the document:
No. Date Description Page
1 February 2010 Preliminary issue All
2 May 2010 Issued All
3 July 2010 ETHERNET explanations
1.15 July 2011 AMI 632 explanations
1.15a January 2012 Functional test explanations
HPB 400 and HPB 600
1.24 2013
explanations
Synchronizer option, DRTS9
1.28 2014
option
1.33 March 2015 Complete manual revision All

Table 11 - Revision Index


Page left intentionally blank.
ISA HEADQUARTER

I.S.A. S.r.l.
via Prati Bassi 22, 21020 Taino (Va) – ITALY
Phone +39 0331956081
Fax +39 0331957091
Email isa@isatest.com

REGIONAL OFFICES
ISA ADVANCE INSTRUMENTS (I) Pvt. Ltd.
C-33, Ground Floor, Sector-2, NOIDA-201
301, Uttar Pradesh, INDIA
Phone +91120 4543853 / 54 / 4222712
Fax +91120 4574772
Email info.asia@isatest.com

ISA PACIFIC PTE Ltd


Blk 10, Kaki Bukit Ave 4, #08-68, Premier@kaki Bukit
Singapore, 415874
Phone +65 6278 3280
Fax +65 6278 2381
Email isatest@singnet.com.sg

ISA Latin America


Belo Horizonte
Phone +55 31 9 9232 3536
Email: nivalda.martins@isatest.com

ISA GCC
Office no 713, Business Avenue Building Port Saeed Road , Dubai - United Arab
Emirates
Phone : +971 4 2956664 +971 565044668
Fax : +971 42956099
Email: imteyaz.siddiqui.GCC@isatest.com
Manual edited by bb Technical Writer & Consulting
Via dei Frassini 32, 21020 Bodio Lomnago (VA), Italy - +39 340 7334857
www.bb-technicalwriter.com – b.bellagente@bb-technicalwriter.com